CA1243536A - Dry image-forming process - Google Patents
Dry image-forming processInfo
- Publication number
- CA1243536A CA1243536A CA000449791A CA449791A CA1243536A CA 1243536 A CA1243536 A CA 1243536A CA 000449791 A CA000449791 A CA 000449791A CA 449791 A CA449791 A CA 449791A CA 1243536 A CA1243536 A CA 1243536A
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- dye
- group
- silver
- light
- hydrophilic
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired
Links
- 238000000034 method Methods 0.000 title claims abstract description 99
- 230000008569 process Effects 0.000 title claims abstract description 66
- 239000000463 material Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 207
- -1 silver halide Chemical class 0.000 claims abstract description 122
- 150000001875 compounds Chemical class 0.000 claims abstract description 112
- 229910052709 silver Inorganic materials 0.000 claims abstract description 86
- 239000004332 silver Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 86
- 239000002904 solvent Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 70
- 238000010438 heat treatment Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 61
- 238000011161 development Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 46
- XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N water Substances O XLYOFNOQVPJJNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims abstract description 46
- 238000012546 transfer Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 30
- 239000011230 binding agent Substances 0.000 claims abstract description 27
- 238000006243 chemical reaction Methods 0.000 claims abstract description 22
- 230000002829 reductive effect Effects 0.000 claims abstract description 8
- GGCZERPQGJTIQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N sodium;9,10-dioxoanthracene-2-sulfonic acid Chemical compound [Na+].C1=CC=C2C(=O)C3=CC(S(=O)(=O)O)=CC=C3C(=O)C2=C1 GGCZERPQGJTIQP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 59
- 125000000217 alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 33
- 239000002243 precursor Substances 0.000 claims description 30
- 239000007800 oxidant agent Substances 0.000 claims description 23
- 125000003118 aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 21
- 239000003795 chemical substances by application Substances 0.000 claims description 19
- ZUNKMNLKJXRCDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N silver bromoiodide Chemical compound [Ag].IBr ZUNKMNLKJXRCDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 18
- 239000012190 activator Substances 0.000 claims description 14
- 125000001424 substituent group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 12
- 125000004435 hydrogen atom Chemical group [H]* 0.000 claims description 8
- 125000000623 heterocyclic group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 7
- 125000000753 cycloalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 5
- 150000007933 aliphatic carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 claims description 4
- 125000003710 aryl alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 4
- WPYMKLBDIGXBTP-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 WPYMKLBDIGXBTP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 4
- HOLVRJRSWZOAJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Ag].ICl Chemical group [Ag].ICl HOLVRJRSWZOAJU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 3
- 239000007787 solid Substances 0.000 claims description 3
- XCFIVNQHHFZRNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Ag].Cl[IH]Br Chemical compound [Ag].Cl[IH]Br XCFIVNQHHFZRNR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims description 2
- 238000000354 decomposition reaction Methods 0.000 claims description 2
- 239000000155 melt Substances 0.000 claims description 2
- 239000011368 organic material Substances 0.000 claims description 2
- 125000003107 substituted aryl group Chemical group 0.000 claims description 2
- VRDIULHPQTYCLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Prothionamide Chemical compound CCCC1=CC(C(N)=S)=CC=N1 VRDIULHPQTYCLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 claims 1
- 125000000547 substituted alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 claims 1
- 239000000975 dye Substances 0.000 description 219
- 239000010410 layer Substances 0.000 description 127
- 239000002585 base Substances 0.000 description 45
- 239000000243 solution Substances 0.000 description 41
- 230000018109 developmental process Effects 0.000 description 40
- 239000000839 emulsion Substances 0.000 description 39
- XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Urea Chemical compound NC(N)=O XSQUKJJJFZCRTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 38
- 108010010803 Gelatin Proteins 0.000 description 36
- 235000019322 gelatine Nutrition 0.000 description 36
- 235000011852 gelatine desserts Nutrition 0.000 description 36
- 229940014259 gelatin Drugs 0.000 description 35
- 229920000159 gelatin Polymers 0.000 description 35
- 239000008273 gelatin Substances 0.000 description 35
- BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Silver Chemical compound [Ag] BQCADISMDOOEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 26
- 239000002253 acid Substances 0.000 description 23
- 239000007864 aqueous solution Substances 0.000 description 22
- 239000011440 grout Substances 0.000 description 22
- 239000000203 mixture Substances 0.000 description 22
- 229920000642 polymer Polymers 0.000 description 22
- 235000013877 carbamide Nutrition 0.000 description 21
- 125000002887 hydroxy group Chemical group [H]O* 0.000 description 21
- 239000004202 carbamide Substances 0.000 description 19
- 239000006185 dispersion Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000004094 surface-active agent Substances 0.000 description 16
- 239000008199 coating composition Substances 0.000 description 15
- 150000003839 salts Chemical class 0.000 description 15
- 238000009835 boiling Methods 0.000 description 14
- 238000000576 coating method Methods 0.000 description 13
- XGEGHDBEHXKFPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methyl urea Chemical compound CNC(N)=O XGEGHDBEHXKFPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- SQGYOTSLMSWVJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N silver(1+) nitrate Chemical compound [Ag+].[O-]N(=O)=O SQGYOTSLMSWVJD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 12
- IBWXIFXUDGADCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2h-benzotriazole;silver Chemical compound [Ag].C1=CC=C2NN=NC2=C1 IBWXIFXUDGADCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethanol Chemical compound CCO LFQSCWFLJHTTHZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 11
- 125000003545 alkoxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 11
- 125000004432 carbon atom Chemical group C* 0.000 description 11
- 125000002496 methyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 11
- 239000003960 organic solvent Substances 0.000 description 11
- 239000011248 coating agent Substances 0.000 description 10
- 125000005843 halogen group Chemical group 0.000 description 10
- 239000011241 protective layer Substances 0.000 description 10
- XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl acetate Chemical compound CCOC(C)=O XEKOWRVHYACXOJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 9
- 239000002202 Polyethylene glycol Substances 0.000 description 9
- 125000004442 acylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 9
- 229920001223 polyethylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 9
- NLKNQRATVPKPDG-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium iodide Chemical compound [K+].[I-] NLKNQRATVPKPDG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 9
- 150000003378 silver Chemical class 0.000 description 9
- JKFYKCYQEWQPTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-azaniumyl-2-(4-fluorophenyl)acetate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(N)C1=CC=C(F)C=C1 JKFYKCYQEWQPTM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- DLFVBJFMPXGRIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetamide Chemical compound CC(N)=O DLFVBJFMPXGRIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910021612 Silver iodide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 125000004397 aminosulfonyl group Chemical group NS(=O)(=O)* 0.000 description 8
- 239000003638 chemical reducing agent Substances 0.000 description 8
- 239000013078 crystal Substances 0.000 description 8
- 229920000139 polyethylene terephthalate Polymers 0.000 description 8
- 239000005020 polyethylene terephthalate Substances 0.000 description 8
- 238000002360 preparation method Methods 0.000 description 8
- 238000011160 research Methods 0.000 description 8
- 229940045105 silver iodide Drugs 0.000 description 8
- WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N tungsten Chemical compound [W] WFKWXMTUELFFGS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 8
- 229910052721 tungsten Inorganic materials 0.000 description 8
- 239000010937 tungsten Substances 0.000 description 8
- GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Titan oxide Chemical compound O=[Ti]=O GWEVSGVZZGPLCZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- 125000001931 aliphatic group Chemical group 0.000 description 7
- 239000012964 benzotriazole Substances 0.000 description 7
- 150000002148 esters Chemical class 0.000 description 7
- CZLCEPVHPYKDPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N guanidine;2,2,2-trichloroacetic acid Chemical compound NC(N)=N.OC(=O)C(Cl)(Cl)Cl CZLCEPVHPYKDPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 7
- ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Guanidine Chemical compound NC(N)=N ZRALSGWEFCBTJO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methanol Chemical compound OC OKKJLVBELUTLKV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- BAPJBEWLBFYGME-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl acrylate Chemical compound COC(=O)C=C BAPJBEWLBFYGME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M Potassium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[K+] KWYUFKZDYYNOTN-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 6
- CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L Sodium Carbonate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[O-]C([O-])=O CDBYLPFSWZWCQE-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 6
- HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M Sodium hydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[Na+] HEMHJVSKTPXQMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 6
- YSMRWXYRXBRSND-UHFFFAOYSA-N TOTP Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=C1OP(=O)(OC=1C(=CC=CC=1)C)OC1=CC=CC=C1C YSMRWXYRXBRSND-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 6
- 125000004414 alkyl thio group Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 125000003178 carboxy group Chemical group [H]OC(*)=O 0.000 description 6
- 229910052736 halogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 150000002367 halogens Chemical class 0.000 description 6
- 150000002430 hydrocarbons Chemical group 0.000 description 6
- 230000007062 hydrolysis Effects 0.000 description 6
- 238000006460 hydrolysis reaction Methods 0.000 description 6
- IOLCXVTUBQKXJR-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium bromide Chemical compound [K+].[Br-] IOLCXVTUBQKXJR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 6
- 229910001961 silver nitrate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 6
- 239000004372 Polyvinyl alcohol Substances 0.000 description 5
- 125000005110 aryl thio group Chemical group 0.000 description 5
- 125000003917 carbamoyl group Chemical group [H]N([H])C(*)=O 0.000 description 5
- KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N citric acid Natural products OC(=O)CC(O)(C(O)=O)CC(O)=O KRKNYBCHXYNGOX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 239000000084 colloidal system Substances 0.000 description 5
- DZVCFNFOPIZQKX-LTHRDKTGSA-M merocyanine Chemical compound [Na+].O=C1N(CCCC)C(=O)N(CCCC)C(=O)C1=C\C=C\C=C/1N(CCCS([O-])(=O)=O)C2=CC=CC=C2O\1 DZVCFNFOPIZQKX-LTHRDKTGSA-M 0.000 description 5
- 238000002156 mixing Methods 0.000 description 5
- 150000007530 organic bases Chemical class 0.000 description 5
- 229920002451 polyvinyl alcohol Polymers 0.000 description 5
- 229940068984 polyvinyl alcohol Drugs 0.000 description 5
- 235000019422 polyvinyl alcohol Nutrition 0.000 description 5
- 230000002335 preservative effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- 238000004062 sedimentation Methods 0.000 description 5
- 230000001235 sensitizing effect Effects 0.000 description 5
- ADZWSOLPGZMUMY-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver bromide Chemical compound [Ag]Br ADZWSOLPGZMUMY-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 5
- YNJBWRMUSHSURL-UHFFFAOYSA-N trichloroacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(Cl)(Cl)Cl YNJBWRMUSHSURL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 5
- 229920002554 vinyl polymer Polymers 0.000 description 5
- QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M (4z)-1-(3-methylbutyl)-4-[[1-(3-methylbutyl)quinolin-1-ium-4-yl]methylidene]quinoline;iodide Chemical compound [I-].C12=CC=CC=C2N(CCC(C)C)C=CC1=CC1=CC=[N+](CCC(C)C)C2=CC=CC=C12 QGKMIGUHVLGJBR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- CJEKMBRTGTXPDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(2-ethylhexoxy)-4-oxobutanoic acid;sodium Chemical compound [Na].CCCCC(CC)COC(=O)CCC(O)=O CJEKMBRTGTXPDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N Iron Chemical compound [Fe] XEEYBQQBJWHFJM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- YNAVUWVOSKDBBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Morpholine Chemical compound C1COCCN1 YNAVUWVOSKDBBP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 229920003171 Poly (ethylene oxide) Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 125000002252 acyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- 125000003277 amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 4
- QRUDEWIWKLJBPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzotriazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2N[N][N]C2=C1 QRUDEWIWKLJBPS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000004061 bleaching Methods 0.000 description 4
- 125000001951 carbamoylamino group Chemical group C(N)(=O)N* 0.000 description 4
- 229910052799 carbon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- DOIRQSBPFJWKBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N dibutyl phthalate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCCCC DOIRQSBPFJWKBE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 238000009792 diffusion process Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000001035 drying Methods 0.000 description 4
- FKRCODPIKNYEAC-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethyl propionate Chemical compound CCOC(=O)CC FKRCODPIKNYEAC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- NAQMVNRVTILPCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexane-1,6-diamine Chemical compound NCCCCCCN NAQMVNRVTILPCV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 230000001965 increasing effect Effects 0.000 description 4
- 229910052740 iodine Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- QQVIHTHCMHWDBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N isophthalic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC(C(O)=O)=C1 QQVIHTHCMHWDBS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 4
- 125000000325 methylidene group Chemical group [H]C([H])=* 0.000 description 4
- 239000000178 monomer Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229910052757 nitrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 4
- 150000002894 organic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- 239000002245 particle Substances 0.000 description 4
- 238000007639 printing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 238000012545 processing Methods 0.000 description 4
- 239000000126 substance Substances 0.000 description 4
- 229940124530 sulfonamide Drugs 0.000 description 4
- 150000003456 sulfonamides Chemical class 0.000 description 4
- BDHFUVZGWQCTTF-UHFFFAOYSA-M sulfonate Chemical compound [O-]S(=O)=O BDHFUVZGWQCTTF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 4
- 229920001059 synthetic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 4
- 235000010215 titanium dioxide Nutrition 0.000 description 4
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetic acid Chemical compound CC(O)=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetone Chemical compound CC(C)=O CSCPPACGZOOCGX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetonitrile Chemical compound CC#N WEVYAHXRMPXWCK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonia Chemical compound N QGZKDVFQNNGYKY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene oxide Chemical compound C1CO1 IAYPIBMASNFSPL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- RYECOJGRJDOGPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylurea Chemical compound CCNC(N)=O RYECOJGRJDOGPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- WMFOQBRAJBCJND-UHFFFAOYSA-M Lithium hydroxide Chemical compound [Li+].[OH-] WMFOQBRAJBCJND-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 3
- ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N N,N-Dimethylformamide Chemical compound CN(C)C=O ZMXDDKWLCZADIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- CHJJGSNFBQVOTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methyl-guanidine Natural products CNC(N)=N CHJJGSNFBQVOTG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Phosphoric acid Chemical group OP(O)(O)=O NBIIXXVUZAFLBC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N Pyridine Chemical class C1=CC=NC=C1 JUJWROOIHBZHMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000002441 X-ray diffraction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 150000007513 acids Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 230000009471 action Effects 0.000 description 3
- 239000000654 additive Substances 0.000 description 3
- 150000001408 amides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 150000001450 anions Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 150000004982 aromatic amines Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 125000004657 aryl sulfonyl amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 239000012298 atmosphere Substances 0.000 description 3
- 125000004429 atom Chemical group 0.000 description 3
- 230000015572 biosynthetic process Effects 0.000 description 3
- BTANRVKWQNVYAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N butan-2-ol Chemical compound CCC(C)O BTANRVKWQNVYAZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920002678 cellulose Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 125000004093 cyano group Chemical group *C#N 0.000 description 3
- SWSQBOPZIKWTGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N dimethylaminoamidine Natural products CN(C)C(N)=N SWSQBOPZIKWTGO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- GVGUFUZHNYFZLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N dodecyl benzenesulfonate;sodium Chemical compound [Na].CCCCCCCCCCCCOS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 GVGUFUZHNYFZLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 230000006870 function Effects 0.000 description 3
- 150000004679 hydroxides Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazole Natural products C1=CNC=N1 RAXXELZNTBOGNW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- YAMHXTCMCPHKLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N imidazolidin-2-one Chemical compound O=C1NCCN1 YAMHXTCMCPHKLN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 150000007529 inorganic bases Chemical class 0.000 description 3
- 239000004816 latex Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229920000126 latex Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000007788 liquid Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229910052751 metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 239000002184 metal Substances 0.000 description 3
- UMBBGOALZMAJSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-benzylethenamine;hydrochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].C=C[NH2+]CC1=CC=CC=C1 UMBBGOALZMAJSF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 229920000620 organic polymer Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 229910052760 oxygen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229920000728 polyester Polymers 0.000 description 3
- 239000001267 polyvinylpyrrolidone Substances 0.000 description 3
- 235000013855 polyvinylpyrrolidone Nutrition 0.000 description 3
- 239000000047 product Substances 0.000 description 3
- ILVXOBCQQYKLDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyridine N-oxide Chemical compound [O-][N+]1=CC=CC=C1 ILVXOBCQQYKLDS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 3
- 238000006479 redox reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 238000007127 saponification reaction Methods 0.000 description 3
- 229910000029 sodium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 3
- 229940080264 sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 125000000020 sulfo group Chemical group O=S(=O)([*])O[H] 0.000 description 3
- 239000004408 titanium dioxide Substances 0.000 description 3
- 229940066528 trichloroacetate Drugs 0.000 description 3
- 150000005208 1,4-dihydroxybenzenes Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- KPVMVJXYXFUVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 12-ethyltetradecan-1-amine Chemical compound CCC(CC)CCCCCCCCCCCN KPVMVJXYXFUVLR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- GVNVAWHJIKLAGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(cyclohexen-1-yl)cyclohexan-1-one Chemical compound O=C1CCCCC1C1=CCCCC1 GVNVAWHJIKLAGL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XLLIQLLCWZCATF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methoxyethyl acetate Chemical compound COCCOC(C)=O XLLIQLLCWZCATF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LAQYHRQFABOIFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methoxyhydroquinone Chemical compound COC1=CC(O)=CC=C1O LAQYHRQFABOIFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BSKHPKMHTQYZBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylpyridine Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=N1 BSKHPKMHTQYZBB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NSPMIYGKQJPBQR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4H-1,2,4-triazole Chemical compound C=1N=CNN=1 NSPMIYGKQJPBQR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CLENKVQTZCLNQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-propylheptadecan-9-yl dihydrogen phosphate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCC(CCC)(OP(O)(O)=O)CCCCCCCC CLENKVQTZCLNQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9H-carbazole Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C3=CC=CC=C3NC2=C1 UJOBWOGCFQCDNV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M Acetate Chemical compound CC([O-])=O QTBSBXVTEAMEQO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- QZCLKYGREBVARF-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetyl tributyl citrate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)CC(C(=O)OCCCC)(OC(C)=O)CC(=O)OCCCC QZCLKYGREBVARF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NLHHRLWOUZZQLW-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acrylonitrile Chemical compound C=CC#N NLHHRLWOUZZQLW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ammonium hydroxide Chemical compound [NH4+].[OH-] VHUUQVKOLVNVRT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- CIWBSHSKHKDKBQ-JLAZNSOCSA-N Ascorbic acid Chemical compound OC[C@H](O)[C@H]1OC(=O)C(O)=C1O CIWBSHSKHKDKBQ-JLAZNSOCSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000005711 Benzoic acid Substances 0.000 description 2
- CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-M Bromide Chemical compound [Br-] CPELXLSAUQHCOX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- DKPFZGUDAPQIHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Butyl acetate Natural products CCCCOC(C)=O DKPFZGUDAPQIHT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920000084 Gum arabic Polymers 0.000 description 2
- QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydroquinone Chemical group OC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 QIGBRXMKCJKVMJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NTIZESTWPVYFNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl isobutyl ketone Chemical compound CC(C)CC(C)=O NTIZESTWPVYFNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- UIHCLUNTQKBZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methyl isobutyl ketone Natural products CCC(C)C(C)=O UIHCLUNTQKBZGK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- BAVYZALUXZFZLV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Methylamine Chemical compound NC BAVYZALUXZFZLV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N Palladium Chemical compound [Pd] KDLHZDBZIXYQEI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NQRYJNQNLNOLGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N Piperidine Chemical compound C1CCNCC1 NQRYJNQNLNOLGT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000004952 Polyamide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004698 Polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 2
- 239000004793 Polystyrene Substances 0.000 description 2
- 241000206607 Porphyra umbilicalis Species 0.000 description 2
- SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Quinoline Chemical compound N1=CC=CC2=CC=CC=C21 SMWDFEZZVXVKRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910006074 SO2NH2 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 241000978776 Senegalia senegal Species 0.000 description 2
- 229920002472 Starch Polymers 0.000 description 2
- KKEYFWRCBNTPAC-UHFFFAOYSA-N Terephthalic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=C(C(O)=O)C=C1 KKEYFWRCBNTPAC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Trifluoroacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(F)(F)F DTQVDTLACAAQTR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000000205 acacia gum Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000010489 acacia gum Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- WNLRTRBMVRJNCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N adipic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CCCCC(O)=O WNLRTRBMVRJNCN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000001298 alcohols Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 229910052783 alkali metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 125000004183 alkoxy alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000004656 alkyl sulfonylamino group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 150000001412 amines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001413 amino acids Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000000908 ammonium hydroxide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 125000005160 aryl oxy alkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 125000004104 aryloxy group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 235000010233 benzoic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 150000001565 benzotriazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 239000003054 catalyst Substances 0.000 description 2
- 150000001767 cationic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000001768 cations Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 239000001913 cellulose Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920002301 cellulose acetate Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000003086 colorant Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920001577 copolymer Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 238000004132 cross linking Methods 0.000 description 2
- 238000007766 curtain coating Methods 0.000 description 2
- MLIREBYILWEBDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyanoacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CC#N MLIREBYILWEBDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- JHIVVAPYMSGYDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexanone Chemical compound O=C1CCCCC1 JHIVVAPYMSGYDF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XWVQUJDBOICHGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N dioctyl nonanedioate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCOC(=O)CCCCCCCC(=O)OCCCCCCCC XWVQUJDBOICHGH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenyl Chemical compound C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 ZUOUZKKEUPVFJK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- ASMQGLCHMVWBQR-UHFFFAOYSA-M diphenyl phosphate Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1OP(=O)([O-])OC1=CC=CC=C1 ASMQGLCHMVWBQR-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 2
- 230000000694 effects Effects 0.000 description 2
- LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethylene glycol Natural products OCCO LYCAIKOWRPUZTN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000004676 glycans Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- KWIUHFFTVRNATP-UHFFFAOYSA-N glycine betaine Chemical compound C[N+](C)(C)CC([O-])=O KWIUHFFTVRNATP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- LEQAOMBKQFMDFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N glyoxal Chemical compound O=CC=O LEQAOMBKQFMDFZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N hexanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCC(O)=O FUZZWVXGSFPDMH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000012456 homogeneous solution Substances 0.000 description 2
- 230000002209 hydrophobic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- 150000002443 hydroxylamines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000002460 imidazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 150000003949 imides Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 230000006872 improvement Effects 0.000 description 2
- 239000011229 interlayer Substances 0.000 description 2
- FBSFWRHWHYMIOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl 3,4,5-trihydroxybenzoate Chemical compound COC(=O)C1=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C1 FBSFWRHWHYMIOG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 239000005445 natural material Substances 0.000 description 2
- QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N nitrogen group Chemical group [N] QJGQUHMNIGDVPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000000269 nucleophilic effect Effects 0.000 description 2
- XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N o-dicarboxybenzene Natural products OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- VECVSKFWRQYTAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N octyl benzoate Chemical compound CCCCCCCCOC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 VECVSKFWRQYTAL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 230000033116 oxidation-reduction process Effects 0.000 description 2
- RZXMPPFPUUCRFN-UHFFFAOYSA-N p-toluidine Chemical compound CC1=CC=C(N)C=C1 RZXMPPFPUUCRFN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000003014 phosphoric acid esters Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N platinum Chemical compound [Pt] BASFCYQUMIYNBI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229920002401 polyacrylamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920002647 polyamide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920006289 polycarbonate film Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920000573 polyethylene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 229920001282 polysaccharide Polymers 0.000 description 2
- 239000005017 polysaccharide Substances 0.000 description 2
- 229920002223 polystyrene Polymers 0.000 description 2
- BWHMMNNQKKPAPP-UHFFFAOYSA-L potassium carbonate Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[O-]C([O-])=O BWHMMNNQKKPAPP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 2
- 238000004321 preservation Methods 0.000 description 2
- 230000002265 prevention Effects 0.000 description 2
- NDGRWYRVNANFNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N pyrazolidin-3-one Chemical class O=C1CCNN1 NDGRWYRVNANFNB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000003222 pyridines Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000001453 quaternary ammonium group Chemical group 0.000 description 2
- 229910052705 radium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 230000035945 sensitivity Effects 0.000 description 2
- YRSQDSCQMOUOKO-KVVVOXFISA-M silver;(z)-octadec-9-enoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCC\C=C/CCCCCCCC([O-])=O YRSQDSCQMOUOKO-KVVVOXFISA-M 0.000 description 2
- FQENQNTWSFEDLI-UHFFFAOYSA-J sodium diphosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O FQENQNTWSFEDLI-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 2
- 239000008107 starch Substances 0.000 description 2
- 235000019698 starch Nutrition 0.000 description 2
- 238000003756 stirring Methods 0.000 description 2
- KZNICNPSHKQLFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N succinimide Chemical compound O=C1CCC(=O)N1 KZNICNPSHKQLFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 229910052717 sulfur Inorganic materials 0.000 description 2
- 238000003786 synthesis reaction Methods 0.000 description 2
- RYCLIXPGLDDLTM-UHFFFAOYSA-J tetrapotassium;phosphonato phosphate Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[K+].[K+].[O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O RYCLIXPGLDDLTM-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 2
- CWERGRDVMFNCDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N thioglycolic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)CS CWERGRDVMFNCDR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- NJPOTNJJCSJJPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tributyl benzene-1,3,5-tricarboxylate Chemical compound CCCCOC(=O)C1=CC(C(=O)OCCCC)=CC(C(=O)OCCCC)=C1 NJPOTNJJCSJJPJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- QMKYBPDZANOJGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N trimesic acid Natural products OC(=O)C1=CC(C(O)=O)=CC(C(O)=O)=C1 QMKYBPDZANOJGF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- XZZNDPSIHUTMOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N triphenyl phosphate Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1OP(OC=1C=CC=CC=1)(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1 XZZNDPSIHUTMOC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 2
- 150000003672 ureas Chemical class 0.000 description 2
- 125000000391 vinyl group Chemical group [H]C([*])=C([H])[H] 0.000 description 2
- OYJIGVHLPHCXPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N (4-methylphenyl)azanium;2,2,2-trichloroacetate Chemical compound OC(=O)C(Cl)(Cl)Cl.CC1=CC=C(N)C=C1 OYJIGVHLPHCXPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WRIDQFICGBMAFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N (E)-8-Octadecenoic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCC(O)=O WRIDQFICGBMAFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LUMLZKVIXLWTCI-NSCUHMNNSA-N (e)-2,3-dichloro-4-oxobut-2-enoic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C(\Cl)=C(/Cl)C=O LUMLZKVIXLWTCI-NSCUHMNNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000005206 1,2-dihydroxybenzenes Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- AIGNCQCMONAWOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-benzoselenazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2[se]C=NC2=C1 AIGNCQCMONAWOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ODIRBFFBCSTPTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-selenazole Chemical class C1=C[se]C=N1 ODIRBFFBCSTPTO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZOBPZXTWZATXDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,3-thiazolidine-2,4-dione Chemical class O=C1CSC(=O)N1 ZOBPZXTWZATXDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YLVACWCCJCZITJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-dioxane-2,3-diol Chemical compound OC1OCCOC1O YLVACWCCJCZITJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CBCKQZAAMUWICA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1,4-phenylenediamine Chemical compound NC1=CC=C(N)C=C1 CBCKQZAAMUWICA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SIQZJFKTROUNPI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-(hydroxymethyl)-5,5-dimethylhydantoin Chemical compound CC1(C)N(CO)C(=O)NC1=O SIQZJFKTROUNPI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FYBFGAFWCBMEDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-[3,5-di(prop-2-enoyl)-1,3,5-triazinan-1-yl]prop-2-en-1-one Chemical compound C=CC(=O)N1CN(C(=O)C=C)CN(C(=O)C=C)C1 FYBFGAFWCBMEDG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UUFQTNFCRMXOAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-methylmethylene Chemical compound C[CH] UUFQTNFCRMXOAE-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VBICKXHEKHSIBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 1-monostearoylglycerol Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC(=O)OCC(O)CO VBICKXHEKHSIBG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KGRVJHAUYBGFFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,2'-Methylenebis(4-methyl-6-tert-butylphenol) Chemical compound CC(C)(C)C1=CC(C)=CC(CC=2C(=C(C=C(C)C=2)C(C)(C)C)O)=C1O KGRVJHAUYBGFFP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DBCKMJVEAUXWJJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,3-dichlorobenzene-1,4-diol Chemical compound OC1=CC=C(O)C(Cl)=C1Cl DBCKMJVEAUXWJJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000004201 2,4-dichlorophenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C(*)=C(Cl)C([H])=C1Cl 0.000 description 1
- GPASWZHHWPVSRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,5-dimethylbenzene-1,4-diol Chemical compound CC1=CC(O)=C(C)C=C1O GPASWZHHWPVSRG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YKUDHBLDJYZZQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2,6-dichloro-1h-1,3,5-triazin-4-one Chemical compound OC1=NC(Cl)=NC(Cl)=N1 YKUDHBLDJYZZQS-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BIEFDNUEROKZRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(2-phenylethenyl)aniline Chemical group NC1=CC=CC=C1C=CC1=CC=CC=C1 BIEFDNUEROKZRA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FVQQWSSTYVBNST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-(4-methyl-2-sulfanylidene-1,3-thiazol-3-yl)acetic acid Chemical compound CC1=CSC(=S)N1CC(O)=O FVQQWSSTYVBNST-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PTTPXKJBFFKCEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-Methyl-4-heptanone Chemical compound CC(C)CC(=O)CC(C)C PTTPXKJBFFKCEK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SZTBMYHIYNGYIA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 2-chloroacrylate Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C(Cl)=C SZTBMYHIYNGYIA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- VKNASXZDGZNEDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-cyanoethyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OCCC#N VKNASXZDGZNEDA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SVONRAPFKPVNKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-ethoxyethyl acetate Chemical compound CCOCCOC(C)=O SVONRAPFKPVNKG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NEAQRZUHTPSBBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxy-3,3-dimethyl-7-nitro-4h-isoquinolin-1-one Chemical compound C1=C([N+]([O-])=O)C=C2C(=O)N(O)C(C)(C)CC2=C1 NEAQRZUHTPSBBM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MOXDGMSQFFMNHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-hydroxybenzenesulfonamide Chemical class NS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1O MOXDGMSQFFMNHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BNCWNZSBTPDDME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-methylpyridine;2,2,2-trichloroacetic acid Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC=N1.OC(=O)C(Cl)(Cl)Cl BNCWNZSBTPDDME-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-propanol Substances CC(C)O KFZMGEQAYNKOFK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UGWULZWUXSCWPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-sulfanylideneimidazolidin-4-one Chemical class O=C1CNC(=S)N1 UGWULZWUXSCWPX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VYNUATGQEAAPAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-sulfonylacetic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C=S(=O)=O VYNUATGQEAAPAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KGIGUEBEKRSTEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 2-vinylpyridine Chemical compound C=CC1=CC=CC=N1 KGIGUEBEKRSTEW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- LQJBNNIYVWPHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 20:1omega9c fatty acid Natural products CCCCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O LQJBNNIYVWPHFW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QGGXUUYCRXZROA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3,4-bis(methoxycarbonyl)benzenesulfonic acid Chemical compound COC(=O)C1=CC=C(S(O)(=O)=O)C=C1C(=O)OC QGGXUUYCRXZROA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UEGFKFNFTYLWMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-azaniumylbutan-2-ylazanium;dichloride Chemical compound Cl.Cl.CC(N)C(C)N UEGFKFNFTYLWMM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NQJATJCXKYZVEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 3-benzylsulfanyl-1h-1,2,4-triazol-5-amine Chemical compound N1C(N)=NC(SCC=2C=CC=CC=2)=N1 NQJATJCXKYZVEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- YLNKRLLYLJYWEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(2,2-dibutoxyethoxy)-4-oxobutanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCOC(OCCCC)COC(=O)CCC(O)=O YLNKRLLYLJYWEN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MOMKYJPSVWEWPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-(chloromethyl)-2-(4-methylphenyl)-1,3-thiazole Chemical compound C1=CC(C)=CC=C1C1=NC(CCl)=CS1 MOMKYJPSVWEWPM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PLIKAWJENQZMHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-aminophenol Chemical class NC1=CC=C(O)C=C1 PLIKAWJENQZMHA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SJZRECIVHVDYJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-hydroxybutyric acid Chemical compound OCCCC(O)=O SJZRECIVHVDYJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CMGDVUCDZOBDNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 4-methyl-2h-benzotriazole Chemical compound CC1=CC=CC2=NNN=C12 CMGDVUCDZOBDNL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SLXKOJJOQWFEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 6-aminohexanoic acid Chemical compound NCCCCCC(O)=O SLXKOJJOQWFEFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JXSRRBVHLUJJFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7-amino-2-methylsulfanyl-[1,2,4]triazolo[1,5-a]pyrimidine-6-carbonitrile Chemical compound N1=CC(C#N)=C(N)N2N=C(SC)N=C21 JXSRRBVHLUJJFC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 7553-56-2 Chemical compound [I] ZCYVEMRRCGMTRW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QSBYPNXLFMSGKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 9-Heptadecensaeure Natural products CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O QSBYPNXLFMSGKH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WDJHALXBUFZDSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N Acetoacetic acid Natural products CC(=O)CC(O)=O WDJHALXBUFZDSR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- BKGOEKOJWMSNRX-UHFFFAOYSA-L C(C1(C)C(C)(C)C(C(=O)[O-])CC1)(=O)[O-].[Ag+2] Chemical compound C(C1(C)C(C)(C)C(C(=O)[O-])CC1)(=O)[O-].[Ag+2] BKGOEKOJWMSNRX-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- ISMDILRWKSYCOD-GNKBHMEESA-N C(C1=CC=CC=C1)[C@@H]1NC(OCCCCCCCCCCCNC([C@@H](NC(C[C@@H]1O)=O)C(C)C)=O)=O Chemical compound C(C1=CC=CC=C1)[C@@H]1NC(OCCCCCCCCCCCNC([C@@H](NC(C[C@@H]1O)=O)C(C)C)=O)=O ISMDILRWKSYCOD-GNKBHMEESA-N 0.000 description 1
- AXVCDCGTJGNMKM-UHFFFAOYSA-L C(C=1C(C(=O)[O-])=CC=CC1)(=O)[O-].[Ag+2] Chemical compound C(C=1C(C(=O)[O-])=CC=CC1)(=O)[O-].[Ag+2] AXVCDCGTJGNMKM-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- DYYHUAGAPAAERQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L C(CCCCC(=O)[O-])(=O)[O-].[Ag+2] Chemical compound C(CCCCC(=O)[O-])(=O)[O-].[Ag+2] DYYHUAGAPAAERQ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 101100416200 Caenorhabditis elegans rla-0 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N Carbon Chemical compound [C] OKTJSMMVPCPJKN-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004709 Chlorinated polyethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Chromium Chemical compound [Cr] VYZAMTAEIAYCRO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101150065749 Churc1 gene Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 229940126639 Compound 33 Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229940126062 Compound A Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 206010011416 Croup infectious Diseases 0.000 description 1
- XDTMQSROBMDMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Cyclohexane Chemical compound C1CCCCC1 XDTMQSROBMDMFD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N D-Glucitol Natural products OC[C@H](O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](O)CO FBPFZTCFMRRESA-FSIIMWSLSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241000283715 Damaliscus lunatus Species 0.000 description 1
- MQJKPEGWNLWLTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dapsone Chemical class C1=CC(N)=CC=C1S(=O)(=O)C1=CC=C(N)C=C1 MQJKPEGWNLWLTK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N Dextrotartaric acid Chemical compound OC(=O)[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)C(O)=O FEWJPZIEWOKRBE-JCYAYHJZSA-N 0.000 description 1
- MQIUGAXCHLFZKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N Di-n-octyl phthalate Natural products CCCCCCCCOC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCCCCCCCC MQIUGAXCHLFZKX-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ROSDSFDQCJNGOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylamine Chemical compound CNC ROSDSFDQCJNGOL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Dimethylsulphoxide Chemical compound CS(C)=O IAZDPXIOMUYVGZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethene Chemical compound C=C VGGSQFUCUMXWEO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethyl urethane Chemical compound CCOC(N)=O JOYRKODLDBILNP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QUSNBJAOOMFDIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylamine Chemical compound CCN QUSNBJAOOMFDIB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005977 Ethylene Substances 0.000 description 1
- KMTRUDSVKNLOMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N Ethylene carbonate Chemical compound O=C1OCCO1 KMTRUDSVKNLOMY-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- SXRSQZLOMIGNAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glutaraldehyde Chemical compound O=CCCCC=O SXRSQZLOMIGNAQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CTKINSOISVBQLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N Glycidol Chemical class OCC1CO1 CTKINSOISVBQLD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910003600 H2NS Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- NLDMNSXOCDLTTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N Heterophylliin A Natural products O1C2COC(=O)C3=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C3C3=C(O)C(O)=C(O)C=C3C(=O)OC2C(OC(=O)C=2C=C(O)C(O)=C(O)C=2)C(O)C1OC(=O)C1=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C1 NLDMNSXOCDLTTB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N Hydrogen Chemical compound [H][H] UFHFLCQGNIYNRP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 101000913968 Ipomoea purpurea Chalcone synthase C Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 150000000996 L-ascorbic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- OYHQOLUKZRVURQ-HZJYTTRNSA-N Linoleic acid Chemical compound CCCCC\C=C/C\C=C/CCCCCCCC(O)=O OYHQOLUKZRVURQ-HZJYTTRNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M Methacrylate Chemical compound CC(=C)C([O-])=O CERQOIWHTDAKMF-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- AFBPFSWMIHJQDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N N-methyl-N-phenylamine Natural products CNC1=CC=CC=C1 AFBPFSWMIHJQDM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- GVOIQSXBMLNCLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N OOOS Chemical compound OOOS GVOIQSXBMLNCLC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000005642 Oleic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N Oleic acid Natural products CCCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCC(O)=O ZQPPMHVWECSIRJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910019142 PO4 Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 101000907988 Petunia hybrida Chalcone-flavanone isomerase C Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 206010034960 Photophobia Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 206010034972 Photosensitivity reaction Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229920002732 Polyanhydride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 102100038239 Protein Churchill Human genes 0.000 description 1
- BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N Selenium Chemical compound [Se] BUGBHKTXTAQXES-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 206010070834 Sensitisation Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 229910021607 Silver chloride Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- ULUAUXLGCMPNKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfobutanedioic acid Chemical class OC(=O)CC(C(O)=O)S(O)(=O)=O ULUAUXLGCMPNKK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N Sulfur Chemical compound [S] NINIDFKCEFEMDL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 241001000594 Tanna Species 0.000 description 1
- BGNXCDMCOKJUMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N Tert-Butylhydroquinone Chemical compound CC(C)(C)C1=CC(O)=CC=C1O BGNXCDMCOKJUMV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920002359 Tetronic® Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 241001061127 Thione Species 0.000 description 1
- SMEGJBVQLJJKKX-HOTMZDKISA-N [(2R,3S,4S,5R,6R)-5-acetyloxy-3,4,6-trihydroxyoxan-2-yl]methyl acetate Chemical compound CC(=O)OC[C@@H]1[C@H]([C@@H]([C@H]([C@@H](O1)O)OC(=O)C)O)O SMEGJBVQLJJKKX-HOTMZDKISA-N 0.000 description 1
- RZESOXIJGKVAAX-UHFFFAOYSA-L [Ag++].[O-]C(=O)CCC([O-])=O Chemical compound [Ag++].[O-]C(=O)CCC([O-])=O RZESOXIJGKVAAX-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- JXFDPVZHNNCRKT-TYYBGVCCSA-L [Ag+2].[O-]C(=O)\C=C\C([O-])=O Chemical compound [Ag+2].[O-]C(=O)\C=C\C([O-])=O JXFDPVZHNNCRKT-TYYBGVCCSA-L 0.000 description 1
- SJOOOZPMQAWAOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N [Ag].BrCl Chemical compound [Ag].BrCl SJOOOZPMQAWAOP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- PIBQGZLFBAQMLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N [amino(sulfanyl)methylidene]-(2-hydroxyethyl)azanium;2,2,2-trichloroacetate Chemical compound NC(S)=[NH+]CCO.[O-]C(=O)C(Cl)(Cl)Cl PIBQGZLFBAQMLH-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- UVJMTMRFKLJYEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N [amino(sulfanyl)methylidene]azanium;2,2,2-trifluoroacetate Chemical compound NC(S)=[NH2+].[O-]C(=O)C(F)(F)F UVJMTMRFKLJYEC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QMHAHUAQAJVBIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N [methyl(sulfamoyl)amino]methane Chemical compound CN(C)S(N)(=O)=O QMHAHUAQAJVBIW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011358 absorbing material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000001133 acceleration Effects 0.000 description 1
- DHKHKXVYLBGOIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetaldehyde Diethyl Acetal Natural products CCOC(C)OCC DHKHKXVYLBGOIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001241 acetals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- TUCNEACPLKLKNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N acetyl Chemical compound C[C]=O TUCNEACPLKLKNU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940081735 acetylcellulose Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000003213 activating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000013543 active substance Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000005041 acyloxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 230000000996 additive effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000001361 adipic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011037 adipic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000007754 air knife coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000001299 aldehydes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002723 alicyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001340 alkali metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052784 alkaline earth metal Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001342 alkaline earth metals Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000005078 alkoxycarbonylalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000001346 alkyl aryl ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000005215 alkyl ethers Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002947 alkylene group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 229940037003 alum Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910000147 aluminium phosphate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001409 amidines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229960002684 aminocaproic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910021529 ammonia Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000000129 anionic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 235000010323 ascorbic acid Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 229960005070 ascorbic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000011668 ascorbic acid Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000000987 azo dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- RQPZNWPYLFFXCP-UHFFFAOYSA-L barium dihydroxide Chemical compound [OH-].[OH-].[Ba+2] RQPZNWPYLFFXCP-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229910001863 barium hydroxide Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 235000013871 bee wax Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000012166 beeswax Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001555 benzenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- BNZXJGMVVSASQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzenesulfonyl acetate Chemical compound CC(=O)OS(=O)(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 BNZXJGMVVSASQT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- KXNQKOAQSGJCQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzo[e][1,3]benzothiazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2C(N=CS3)=C3C=CC2=C1 KXNQKOAQSGJCQU-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001558 benzoic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- IOJUPLGTWVMSFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N benzothiazole Chemical class C1=CC=C2SC=NC2=C1 IOJUPLGTWVMSFF-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229960003237 betaine Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 230000008033 biological extinction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000004305 biphenyl Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010290 biphenyl Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- BJQHLKABXJIVAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N bis(2-ethylhexyl) phthalate Chemical compound CCCCC(CC)COC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C(=O)OCC(CC)CCCC BJQHLKABXJIVAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920000402 bisphenol A polycarbonate polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910021538 borax Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 150000001642 boronic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000000872 buffer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000001661 cadmium Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000004649 carbonic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001732 carboxylic acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000001735 carboxylic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000002091 cationic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000007795 chemical reaction product Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000004965 chloroalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- AJPXTSMULZANCB-UHFFFAOYSA-N chlorohydroquinone Chemical compound OC1=CC=C(O)C(Cl)=C1 AJPXTSMULZANCB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000001844 chromium Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052804 chromium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011651 chromium Substances 0.000 description 1
- WYYQVWLEPYFFLP-UHFFFAOYSA-K chromium(3+);triacetate Chemical compound [Cr+3].CC([O-])=O.CC([O-])=O.CC([O-])=O WYYQVWLEPYFFLP-UHFFFAOYSA-K 0.000 description 1
- 238000004040 coloring Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229940000425 combination drug Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 238000010276 construction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000002508 contact lithography Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008878 coupling Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000010168 coupling process Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005859 coupling reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000003431 cross linking reagent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 201000010549 croup Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 125000004966 cyanoalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000004122 cyclic group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- VEIOBOXBGYWJIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N cyclohexane;methanol Chemical compound OC.OC.C1CCCCC1 VEIOBOXBGYWJIT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003398 denaturant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000011033 desalting Methods 0.000 description 1
- WOWBFOBYOAGEEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N diafenthiuron Chemical compound CC(C)C1=C(NC(=S)NC(C)(C)C)C(C(C)C)=CC(OC=2C=CC=CC=2)=C1 WOWBFOBYOAGEEA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000000664 diazo group Chemical group [N-]=[N+]=[*] 0.000 description 1
- GJQPMPFPNINLKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N diclofenamide Chemical compound NS(=O)(=O)C1=CC(Cl)=C(Cl)C(S(N)(=O)=O)=C1 GJQPMPFPNINLKP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- HPNMFZURTQLUMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N diethylamine Chemical compound CCNCC HPNMFZURTQLUMO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- ZOMNIUBKTOKEHS-UHFFFAOYSA-L dimercury dichloride Chemical class Cl[Hg][Hg]Cl ZOMNIUBKTOKEHS-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 150000002012 dioxanes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000003618 dip coating Methods 0.000 description 1
- GWZCCUDJHOGOSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N diphenic acid Chemical compound OC(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1C(O)=O GWZCCUDJHOGOSO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001177 diphosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- XPPKVPWEQAFLFU-UHFFFAOYSA-J diphosphate(4-) Chemical class [O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O XPPKVPWEQAFLFU-UHFFFAOYSA-J 0.000 description 1
- 235000011180 diphosphates Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 238000007598 dipping method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000010494 dissociation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000005593 dissociations Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000003792 electrolyte Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000004945 emulsification Methods 0.000 description 1
- ZEUUVJSRINKECZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethanedithioic acid Chemical compound CC(S)=S ZEUUVJSRINKECZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- AEOCXXJPGCBFJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N ethionamide Chemical compound CCC1=CC(C(N)=S)=CC=N1 AEOCXXJPGCBFJA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001495 ethyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])([H])* 0.000 description 1
- 238000002474 experimental method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000005562 fading Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000000835 fiber Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006081 fluorescent whitening agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N formaldehyde Substances O=C WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 238000005755 formation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- LNTHITQWFMADLM-UHFFFAOYSA-M gallate Chemical compound OC1=CC(C([O-])=O)=CC(O)=C1O LNTHITQWFMADLM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000011521 glass Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000005456 glyceride group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000002334 glycols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229940015043 glyoxal Drugs 0.000 description 1
- PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N gold Chemical compound [Au] PCHJSUWPFVWCPO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052737 gold Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010931 gold Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229940093915 gynecological organic acid Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000004820 halides Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002366 halogen compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- PWSKHLMYTZNYKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N heptane-1,7-diamine Chemical compound NCCCCCCCN PWSKHLMYTZNYKO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005842 heteroatom Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000002391 heterocyclic compounds Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052739 hydrogen Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000001257 hydrogen Substances 0.000 description 1
- WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N hydroxyacetaldehyde Natural products OCC=O WGCNASOHLSPBMP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000002768 hydroxyalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000004693 imidazolium salts Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000001841 imino group Chemical group [H]N=* 0.000 description 1
- RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N indolenine group Chemical group N1=CCC2=CC=CC=C12 RKJUIXBNRJVNHR-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002475 indoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000000977 initiatory effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011835 investigation Methods 0.000 description 1
- 239000011630 iodine Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052741 iridium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N iridium atom Chemical compound [Ir] GKOZUEZYRPOHIO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052742 iron Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- QXJSBBXBKPUZAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N isooleic acid Natural products CCCCCCCC=CCCCCCCCCC(O)=O QXJSBBXBKPUZAA-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001449 isopropyl group Chemical group [H]C([H])([H])C([H])(*)C([H])([H])[H] 0.000 description 1
- 150000002596 lactones Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 208000013469 light sensitivity Diseases 0.000 description 1
- 230000001050 lubricating effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 239000011159 matrix material Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000006224 matting agent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000007246 mechanism Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000002844 melting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008018 melting Effects 0.000 description 1
- QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N mercury Chemical compound [Hg] QSHDDOUJBYECFT-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052753 mercury Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 125000005341 metaphosphate group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- HNQIVZYLYMDVSB-UHFFFAOYSA-N methanesulfonimidic acid Chemical compound CS(N)(=O)=O HNQIVZYLYMDVSB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-NJFSPNSNSA-N methanone Chemical compound O=[14CH2] WSFSSNUMVMOOMR-NJFSPNSNSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001434 methanylylidene group Chemical group [H]C#[*] 0.000 description 1
- IBKQQKPQRYUGBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl gallate Natural products CC(=O)C1=CC(O)=C(O)C(O)=C1 IBKQQKPQRYUGBJ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- DDIZAANNODHTRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N methyl p-anisate Chemical compound COC(=O)C1=CC=C(OC)C=C1 DDIZAANNODHTRB-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000003094 microcapsule Substances 0.000 description 1
- 238000012986 modification Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000004048 modification Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000000051 modifying effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- ZAKLKBFCSHJIRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N mucochloric acid Natural products OC1OC(=O)C(Cl)=C1Cl ZAKLKBFCSHJIRI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940105132 myristate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AJDUTMFFZHIJEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N n-(9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl)-4-[4-[[4-[4-[(9,10-dioxoanthracen-1-yl)carbamoyl]phenyl]phenyl]diazenyl]phenyl]benzamide Chemical compound O=C1C2=CC=CC=C2C(=O)C2=C1C=CC=C2NC(=O)C(C=C1)=CC=C1C(C=C1)=CC=C1N=NC(C=C1)=CC=C1C(C=C1)=CC=C1C(=O)NC1=CC=CC2=C1C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C2=O AJDUTMFFZHIJEM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002790 naphthalenes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000001005 nitro dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- 125000000449 nitro group Chemical group [O-][N+](*)=O 0.000 description 1
- 239000002736 nonionic surfactant Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000012434 nucleophilic reagent Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000003287 optical effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000007524 organic acids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 235000005985 organic acids Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 150000002916 oxazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000002918 oxazolines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 230000003647 oxidation Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000007254 oxidation reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000001590 oxidative effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000002923 oximes Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000001820 oxy group Chemical group [*:1]O[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 125000004430 oxygen atom Chemical group O* 0.000 description 1
- QUBQYFYWUJJAAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N oxymethurea Chemical compound OCNC(=O)NCO QUBQYFYWUJJAAK-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229950005308 oxymethurea Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 229910052763 palladium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000000123 paper Substances 0.000 description 1
- ATGAWOHQWWULNK-UHFFFAOYSA-I pentapotassium;[oxido(phosphonatooxy)phosphoryl] phosphate Chemical compound [K+].[K+].[K+].[K+].[K+].[O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O ATGAWOHQWWULNK-UHFFFAOYSA-I 0.000 description 1
- HWGNBUXHKFFFIH-UHFFFAOYSA-I pentasodium;[oxido(phosphonatooxy)phosphoryl] phosphate Chemical compound [Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[Na+].[O-]P([O-])(=O)OP([O-])(=O)OP([O-])([O-])=O HWGNBUXHKFFFIH-UHFFFAOYSA-I 0.000 description 1
- ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenol group Chemical group C1(=CC=CC=C1)O ISWSIDIOOBJBQZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 150000002989 phenols Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- FCJSHPDYVMKCHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N phenyl benzoate Chemical compound C=1C=CC=CC=1C(=O)OC1=CC=CC=C1 FCJSHPDYVMKCHI-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000001997 phenyl group Chemical group [H]C1=C([H])C([H])=C(*)C([H])=C1[H] 0.000 description 1
- 235000021317 phosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000002467 phosphate group Chemical group [H]OP(=O)(O[H])O[*] 0.000 description 1
- 150000003013 phosphoric acid derivatives Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229910052698 phosphorus Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 230000036211 photosensitivity Effects 0.000 description 1
- XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L phthalate(2-) Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O XNGIFLGASWRNHJ-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 239000001007 phthalocyanine dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- YHSKUYNZQAYMPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N piperidine;2,2,2-trichloroacetic acid Chemical compound C1CC[NH2+]CC1.[O-]C(=O)C(Cl)(Cl)Cl YHSKUYNZQAYMPP-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229920003023 plastic Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004033 plastic Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004014 plasticizer Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052697 platinum Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229920003227 poly(N-vinyl carbazole) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001483 poly(ethyl methacrylate) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000205 poly(isobutyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920003229 poly(methyl methacrylate) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002492 poly(sulfone) Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002037 poly(vinyl butyral) polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000058 polyacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002239 polyacrylonitrile Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001515 polyalkylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000768 polyamine Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004417 polycarbonate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000515 polycarbonate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920002776 polycyclohexyl methacrylate Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004848 polyfunctional curative Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000151 polyglycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000010695 polyglycol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 239000004926 polymethyl methacrylate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920006324 polyoxymethylene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001451 polypropylene glycol Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001296 polysiloxane Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920001447 polyvinyl benzene Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 239000004800 polyvinyl chloride Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229920000915 polyvinyl chloride Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229920000036 polyvinylpyrrolidone Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 229910000027 potassium carbonate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- OQZCJRJRGMMSGK-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium metaphosphate Chemical compound [K+].[O-]P(=O)=O OQZCJRJRGMMSGK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229940099402 potassium metaphosphate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- JYILWUOXRMWVGD-UHFFFAOYSA-M potassium;quinoline-2-carboxylate Chemical compound [K+].C1=CC=CC2=NC(C(=O)[O-])=CC=C21 JYILWUOXRMWVGD-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 230000001681 protective effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 108090000623 proteins and genes Proteins 0.000 description 1
- 102000004169 proteins and genes Human genes 0.000 description 1
- 150000003232 pyrogallols Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 150000003233 pyrroles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 239000001397 quillaja saponaria molina bark Substances 0.000 description 1
- LOAUVZALPPNFOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N quinaldic acid Chemical class C1=CC=CC2=NC(C(=O)O)=CC=C21 LOAUVZALPPNFOQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000011541 reaction mixture Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000009257 reactivity Effects 0.000 description 1
- 230000009467 reduction Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000006722 reduction reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 230000008929 regeneration Effects 0.000 description 1
- 238000011069 regeneration method Methods 0.000 description 1
- 238000009877 rendering Methods 0.000 description 1
- KIWUVOGUEXMXSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodanine Chemical class O=C1CSC(=S)N1 KIWUVOGUEXMXSV-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229910052703 rhodium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000010948 rhodium Substances 0.000 description 1
- MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N rhodium atom Chemical compound [Rh] MHOVAHRLVXNVSD-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- CVHZOJJKTDOEJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N saccharin Chemical compound C1=CC=C2C(=O)NS(=O)(=O)C2=C1 CVHZOJJKTDOEJC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 229940081974 saccharin Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 235000019204 saccharin Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000000901 saccharin and its Na,K and Ca salt Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229930182490 saponin Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 150000007949 saponins Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 229930195734 saturated hydrocarbon Natural products 0.000 description 1
- 125000000467 secondary amino group Chemical group [H]N([*:1])[*:2] 0.000 description 1
- 229910052711 selenium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 239000011669 selenium Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000008313 sensitization Effects 0.000 description 1
- IZXSLAZMYLIILP-ODZAUARKSA-M silver (Z)-4-hydroxy-4-oxobut-2-enoate Chemical compound [Ag+].OC(=O)\C=C/C([O-])=O IZXSLAZMYLIILP-ODZAUARKSA-M 0.000 description 1
- NBYLLBXLDOPANK-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver 2-carboxyphenolate hydrate Chemical compound C1=CC=C(C(=C1)C(=O)O)[O-].O.[Ag+] NBYLLBXLDOPANK-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- CQLFBEKRDQMJLZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver acetate Chemical compound [Ag+].CC([O-])=O CQLFBEKRDQMJLZ-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229940071536 silver acetate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- AQRYNYUOKMNDDV-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver behenate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O AQRYNYUOKMNDDV-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- HKZLPVFGJNLROG-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver monochloride Chemical compound [Cl-].[Ag+] HKZLPVFGJNLROG-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- OEVSPXPUUSCCIH-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;2-acetamidobenzoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CC(=O)NC1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O OEVSPXPUUSCCIH-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- JRTHUBNDKBQVKY-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;2-methylbenzoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CC1=CC=CC=C1C([O-])=O JRTHUBNDKBQVKY-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- UCLXRBMHJWLGSO-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;4-methylbenzoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CC1=CC=C(C([O-])=O)C=C1 UCLXRBMHJWLGSO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- RDZTZLBPUKUEIM-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;4-phenylbenzoate Chemical compound [Ag+].C1=CC(C(=O)[O-])=CC=C1C1=CC=CC=C1 RDZTZLBPUKUEIM-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- CLDWGXZGFUNWKB-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;benzoate Chemical compound [Ag+].[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CC=C1 CLDWGXZGFUNWKB-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- JKOCEVIXVMBKJA-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;butanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCC([O-])=O JKOCEVIXVMBKJA-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- OIZSSBDNMBMYFL-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;decanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O OIZSSBDNMBMYFL-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- MNMYRUHURLPFQW-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;dodecanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O MNMYRUHURLPFQW-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- GXBIBRDOPVAJRX-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;furan-2-carboxylate Chemical compound [Ag+].[O-]C(=O)C1=CC=CO1 GXBIBRDOPVAJRX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- LTYHQUJGIQUHMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;hexadecanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O LTYHQUJGIQUHMS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- ORYURPRSXLUCSS-UHFFFAOYSA-M silver;octadecanoate Chemical compound [Ag+].CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC([O-])=O ORYURPRSXLUCSS-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000002356 single layer Substances 0.000 description 1
- APSBXTVYXVQYAB-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium docusate Chemical group [Na+].CCCCC(CC)COC(=O)CC(S([O-])(=O)=O)C(=O)OCC(CC)CCCC APSBXTVYXVQYAB-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 235000019983 sodium metaphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- BAZAXWOYCMUHIX-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium perchlorate Chemical compound [Na+].[O-]Cl(=O)(=O)=O BAZAXWOYCMUHIX-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 229910001488 sodium perchlorate Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- 229940048086 sodium pyrophosphate Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 239000004328 sodium tetraborate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000010339 sodium tetraborate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 235000019832 sodium triphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- PLTCLMZAIZEHGD-UHFFFAOYSA-M sodium;quinoline-2-carboxylate Chemical compound [Na+].C1=CC=CC2=NC(C(=O)[O-])=CC=C21 PLTCLMZAIZEHGD-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 239000000600 sorbitol Substances 0.000 description 1
- 230000000087 stabilizing effect Effects 0.000 description 1
- 150000003431 steroids Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- UCSJYZPVAKXKNQ-HZYVHMACSA-N streptomycin Chemical compound CN[C@H]1[C@H](O)[C@@H](O)[C@H](CO)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@](C=O)(O)[C@H](C)O[C@H]1O[C@@H]1[C@@H](NC(N)=N)[C@H](O)[C@@H](NC(N)=N)[C@H](O)[C@H]1O UCSJYZPVAKXKNQ-HZYVHMACSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005504 styryl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-UHFFFAOYSA-L succinate(2-) Chemical compound [O-]C(=O)CCC([O-])=O KDYFGRWQOYBRFD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 229960002317 succinimide Drugs 0.000 description 1
- 150000005846 sugar alcohols Polymers 0.000 description 1
- QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L sulfate group Chemical group S(=O)(=O)([O-])[O-] QAOWNCQODCNURD-UHFFFAOYSA-L 0.000 description 1
- 125000004964 sulfoalkyl group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000011593 sulfur Substances 0.000 description 1
- 229910052714 tellurium Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- PORWMNRCUJJQNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N tellurium atom Chemical compound [Te] PORWMNRCUJJQNO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000004250 tert-Butylhydroquinone Substances 0.000 description 1
- SJMYWORNLPSJQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N tert-butyl 2-methylprop-2-enoate Chemical compound CC(=C)C(=O)OC(C)(C)C SJMYWORNLPSJQO-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 235000019281 tert-butylhydroquinone Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000001302 tertiary amino group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- DZLFLBLQUQXARW-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrabutylammonium Chemical compound CCCC[N+](CCCC)(CCCC)CCCC DZLFLBLQUQXARW-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- TUNFSRHWOTWDNC-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetradecanoic acid Chemical compound CCCCCCCCCCCCCC(O)=O TUNFSRHWOTWDNC-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RAOIDOHSFRTOEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetrahydrothiophene Chemical compound C1CCSC1 RAOIDOHSFRTOEL-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- QEMXHQIAXOOASZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N tetramethylammonium Chemical compound C[N+](C)(C)C QEMXHQIAXOOASZ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- RXMRGBVLCSYIBO-UHFFFAOYSA-M tetramethylazanium;iodide Chemical compound [I-].C[N+](C)(C)C RXMRGBVLCSYIBO-UHFFFAOYSA-M 0.000 description 1
- 235000019818 tetrasodium diphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 239000001577 tetrasodium phosphonato phosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 150000003536 tetrazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 238000005979 thermal decomposition reaction Methods 0.000 description 1
- 150000003557 thiazoles Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 150000003549 thiazolines Chemical class 0.000 description 1
- 125000000101 thioether group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 125000003396 thiol group Chemical group [H]S* 0.000 description 1
- ILJSQTXMGCGYMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N triacetic acid Chemical compound CC(=O)CC(=O)CC(O)=O ILJSQTXMGCGYMG-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 125000005270 trialkylamine group Chemical group 0.000 description 1
- 239000001226 triphosphate Substances 0.000 description 1
- 235000011178 triphosphate Nutrition 0.000 description 1
- 125000002264 triphosphate group Chemical class [H]OP(=O)(O[H])OP(=O)(O[H])OP(=O)(O[H])O* 0.000 description 1
- 229920003176 water-insoluble polymer Polymers 0.000 description 1
- 238000009736 wetting Methods 0.000 description 1
- 229910052724 xenon Inorganic materials 0.000 description 1
- FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N xenon atom Chemical compound [Xe] FHNFHKCVQCLJFQ-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
- 239000001043 yellow dye Substances 0.000 description 1
- DGVVWUTYPXICAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N β‐Mercaptoethanol Chemical compound OCCS DGVVWUTYPXICAM-UHFFFAOYSA-N 0.000 description 1
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03C—PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
- G03C8/00—Diffusion transfer processes or agents therefor; Photosensitive materials for such processes
- G03C8/40—Development by heat ; Photo-thermographic processes
- G03C8/4013—Development by heat ; Photo-thermographic processes using photothermographic silver salt systems, e.g. dry silver
Landscapes
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Non-Silver Salt Photosensitive Materials And Non-Silver Salt Photography (AREA)
Abstract
ABSTRACT OF THE DISCLOSURE
.
A dry image-forming process is disclosed. The dry image-forming process of the invention comprises heat developing a light-sensitive material comprising a support having thereon at least a photosensitive silver halide, a binder, and a dye releasing redox compound , said dye releasing redox compound being reductive to the photosensitive silver halide and being capable of re-leasing a hydrophilic dye upon reaction with the photo-sensitive silver halide under heating, after or simul-taneously with imagewise exposure, to form imagewise a mobile hydrophilic dye and heating, after simultaneously with the heat development, the light-sensitive material together with a dye-fixing layer in the presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent to thereby transfer the mobile hydrophilic dye onto the dye-fixing layer to form a dye image and fix the dye image.
The heat development is carried out in a state containing substantially no water, and the whole of steps are carried out without particular supplying a solvent.
.
A dry image-forming process is disclosed. The dry image-forming process of the invention comprises heat developing a light-sensitive material comprising a support having thereon at least a photosensitive silver halide, a binder, and a dye releasing redox compound , said dye releasing redox compound being reductive to the photosensitive silver halide and being capable of re-leasing a hydrophilic dye upon reaction with the photo-sensitive silver halide under heating, after or simul-taneously with imagewise exposure, to form imagewise a mobile hydrophilic dye and heating, after simultaneously with the heat development, the light-sensitive material together with a dye-fixing layer in the presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent to thereby transfer the mobile hydrophilic dye onto the dye-fixing layer to form a dye image and fix the dye image.
The heat development is carried out in a state containing substantially no water, and the whole of steps are carried out without particular supplying a solvent.
Description
~2~3t)36 DRY I~GE-FORMIMG PROCESS
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a completely dry image-forming process using a silver halide light-sensitive material. More particularly, the inventionrelates to a process of fixing a color image obtained by heat development on a dye image-fixing layer by heating without using a system containing a solvent.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Since a photographic process using silver halide is excellent in photographic properties such as sensitivity - and gradation control as compared to other photographic processes such as electrophotography and diazo photographic process, the silver halide photographic process has hithér-to been most widely used. Recently, a technique capable of more easily and rapidly obtaining images has been develop-ed by changing an image-forming process of a silver halide photographic material from a conventional wet process such as a process which uses a liquid developer to a dry process such as a developing process which uses heating.
Heat-developable photographic materials are known in this art and the heat-developable materials and image-forming processes using these heat-developable materials are described in, for example, Shahin Kogaku no .. . . .
~Z~3S~6 Kiso (The Basis of Photographic Engineering), pages 553-555, published by Corona K.K. in 1979; Eizo Jooho image Information), page 40, published in April, 1978; Nebletts Handbook of Photography and Reprography, 7th Ed., pages 32-33, (Van Nostrand Reinhold Company); U.S. Patents 3,152,904, 3,301,67&, 3,392,020, 3i457,075; U.K. Patents 1,131,108 and 1,167,777; and Research Disclosure (RD-17029), pages 9-15, June 1978.
Various processes have been proposed for obtain-ing dye images by a dry system. For example, for forming color images by a combination of the oxidation product of a developing agent and a coupler, there are proposed a combination of a p-phenylenediamine reducing agent and a phenolic or active methylene coupler in U.S. Patent 15 3,531,286; p-aminophenol series reducing agents in U.S.
Patent 3,761,270;sulfona~idophenol series reducing agents in Belgian Patent 802,519 and in Research Disclosure, pages 31-32, September 1975; and combination of a sulfonamidophenol series reducing agent and a 4-equivalent 20 coupler in U.S. Patent 4,021,240.
However, in these processes there is a fault that color images become turbid since images of reduced silver and color images are simultaneously formed at light exposed areas after heat development. For overcoming the fault, there are proposed a process of removing ~Z~353~
the silver images by liquid processing and a process of transferring the dyes only to another layer, for example, a sheet having an image-receiving layer. However, there remains a fault that it is not easy to discriminate a dye from the reaction mixture and transfer the dye by itself.
Also, a process of introducing a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring group into a dye, forming a silver salt, and liberating the dye by heat development 10 is described in Research Disclosure, (RD-16966), pages 54-58, May~1978. However, in the process it is difficult to control the liberation of the dye at non-exposed areas, whereby a clear image cannot be obtained and hence the foregoing process is unsuitable for general use.
Also, for forming a positive color image by a heat-sensitive silver dye bleaching process, there are described useful dye bleaching processes in Research Disclosure, (RD-14433), pages 30-32, April 1976; ibid.
(RD-15227), pages 14-15, December 1976; U.S. Patent 2Q 4,235,957, etc.
However, these processes have such faults that additional steps and material are required for accelerating the bleaching of dye, for example, it is required to superpose an activating agent sheet on the light-sensitive material and heat the assembly, and also ,, 53`6 color images obtained are gradually bleached by reduction with free silver, e-tc., existing in the light-sensitive material during the preservation of the images for a long period of time.
Furthermore, a process of forming color images by utilizing leuco dyes is described in, for example, U.S. Patents 3,985,565 and 4,022,617. However, in the process it is difficult to stably incorporate leuco dyes in photographic materials, that is, the photographic materials containing leuco dyes are gradually colored when they are preserved.
Some of the inventors previously provided an image-forming process using a novel photosensitive material capable overcoming these faults in the conventional processes (European Patent 0076492). This process is an image--forming process wherein a photosensitive material capable ox releasing a mobile hydrophilic dye is heated in a state containing substantially no water to release the mobile hydrophilic dye and the hydrophil~c dye is trans-Eerred onto a dye-fixing layer mainly in the presence of a solvent.
SUMMARY OF TOE INVENTION
As the result of further making investigations on such a previous invention, the inventors have discovered that an image composed of a mobile hydrophilic dye which is formed by heating in a state containing substantially 3~i~36 no water can be easily transferred by heating without supplying any solvent.
An object of the present invention is, therefore, to provide a process of fixing a hydrophilic dye image formed by heat development, which is performed after or simultaneously with imagewise exposure, on a dye-fixing layer.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a process of forming a hydrophilic dye image having a high quality in a dye-fixing layer by only heating with-out supplying any solvent in the whole of steps using a heat-developable light-sensitive material containing a dye releasing redox compound capable of releasing a mobile hydrophilic dye upon reactionwith a photosensitive silver halide under heating in a state containing substantially no solvent.
A further object of the present invention is to provide a dye-fixing material suited for the image-forming process, which comprises a support having provided thereon one or more layers containing at least a dye-fixing agent, a thermal solvent and a base and/or a base precursor.
That is, the invention relates to a dry image-forming process which comprises heating a light-sensitive material comprising a support having thereon at least a photosensitive silver halide, a binder and a dye releasing 1~35~6 redox compound reductive to the photosensitive silver halide and capable of releasing a mobile hydrophilic dye upon reaction with the photosensitive silver halide under heating, after or simultaneously with imagewise exposure, to form imagewise a mobile hydrophilic dye by the action of the imagewise exposure and heating of the light-sensitive material, after or simultaneously with heat development, in the presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent without particularly supplying a solven-t to transfer the mobile hydrophili.c dye onto a dye-fixing layer to form a dye image which is then fixed.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
In the light-sensitive materiaI used in the present invention, an oxidation reduction reaction occurs between the photosensitive silver halide and the reductive dye releasing redox compound with the exposed photosensitive silver halide as a catalyst upon heating in a state contain-- ing substantially no water after or simultaneously with image exposure, whereby an image of a mobile hydrophilic dye released from the dye releasing redox compound, which has become an oxidized product by being oxidized with the silver halide,is obtained together with a silver image at the exposed area.
In the present invention the development step is called "heat development" but it is difficult to 3~
distinguish the released able hydrophilic dye image by the heat development only since the unreacted dye releasing redox compound is co-present. However, in the present invention, since the dye of the dye image obtained is a mobile hydrophilic dye, the dye can be transferred onto a dye-fixing layer in an atmosphere wherein the hydro-philic dye has an affinity, whereby a aye image having excellent image quality and preservative property can be obtained. This step is "dye fixing" step in the invention.
It was already disclosed in European Patent 0076492 that in this case the atmosphere having an affinity with the hydrophilic dye can be realized by mainly supplying a solvent. however t in the present invention, the atmosphere having an affinity with the hydrophilic dye is realiæed by the existence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent and hence, it is not necessary to particulalry supply a solvent. Accordingly, a dye image having a color re-producibility can be formed by a comple-tely dry process without need of supplying a solvent in the whole of steps from light exposure to heat development and dye flxing.
This principle is essentially true in the case of using a negative -type silver halide emulsion and in the case of using an autopositive-type silver halide emulsion as the silver halide emulsion for the light-sensitive material. Therefore, in the case of using an 53~i autopositive-type si.lver halide emulsion, a dye image having a good color reproducibility can be obtained in the same manner as in the case of using a negative-type silver halide emulsion except that in the silver image and the mobile dye image obtained at the unexposed areas, only the dye image is transferred onto the dye-fixing layer.
The oxidation-reduction reaction of a photo-sensitive silver halide and a dye releasing redox compound and the subsequently occurred dye-releasing reaction can take place upon heating in a state containing substantially no solvent. The term "heating" referred to herein means heating to 80C to 250C, and the term "a state containing substantially no water" means that the reacti.on system is in an equilibrium state with moisture in air and hence, water is not supplied for causing the reaction or for accelerating the reaction. Such a state is described in The Theory of the Photographic Process, 4th Edition, page 374, Edited by T. H. James, published by Macmillan.
In the present invention, dyes which are re.leased can be selected by selecting dye releasing redox compounds and therefore, various colors can be reproduced.
Accordingly, by selecting a combination of dye-releasing redox compounds, multicolor images can be obtained, dye images in the invention include not only monochromatic images but also multicolor images, and the monochromatic 3S3~i images include a monochromatic image composed of a mixture of two or more colors.
It has hitherto been considered that the dye releasing reaction is caused by the attack of a so-called nucleophilic reagent and the reaction is usually performed in an aqueous solution having a high pH as higher than lO.
Therefore, it is quite exceptional that a light-sensitive material shows a high reactivity upon mere heating in a state containing substantially no water as the case ox the light-sensitive material used in the invention.
Furthermore, considering from conventlonal knowledges obtained from a wet development at about normal temperature, it is also quite exceptional that the dye releasing redox compound used in the invention can cause an oxidation-reduction reaction with a silver halide wlthout need of the aid of a so-called auxiliary develop-ing agent (see European Patent 0076~92). .
The foregoing reaction proceeds particularl~well when an organic silver salt oxidizing agent is co-present in the reaction system, and a high image density can be obtained. Therefore, it is a particularly preferred embodiment that an organic silver salt oxidizing agent is co-present in the reaction system.
L353~6i 1 The dye releasing re.dox compound which releases a hydrophilic diffusible dye used in the present inven-tion is represented by the following general formula (I):
Ra-S02-D (I) wherein Ra represents a reducing group capable of being oxidized by the silver halide; and D represents an image forming dye portion containing a hydrophilic group.
Preferably the reducing grout Ra in the dye releasing redox compound Ra-S02-D has an oxidation-reduction potential. to a saturated calomel electrode of 1.2 V-or less measuring the polarographic half wave potential using acetonitrile as a solvent and sodium perchlorate as a base electrolyte. Preferred examples of .he reducing grout pa include those represented by the following general formulae tII) to (It).
OH
R~ ~NH--R a a ~II) .
- . .
~Z43536 OH
a :R a -I\ R 3 .
OH / Ra // `~ C \ R2 R a V ) .. . . . . . .. ... .. .. .
1'~4353~i Rl--~NH-- C l ) R2 o Rl NH~
' .-.
~0~ , N - C Yll pa a /NH--NH
R a En a . .
~LZ~3S3 Rl NH--N\N NEI
SIX) .
R a R a 1 wherein Ra, Ra, Ra and Ra each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent selected from an alkyl group, a cyclo-alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy grout, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl grout, an acyl grouD, an acylamino group, an alkylsulfonylamino group, an arylsul~onylamino group, an aryloxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an N-substituted carbamoyl grou , an N-substituted sulfamoyl group, a halogen atom, an alkylthio group or an arylthio group. The alkyl ~oietv and the aryl moiety in the above described substituents may be further substituted with an alkoxy grouD, a halogen atomj a hydroxy group, a cyano group, an acyl group, an acylamino group, a substituted carbamoyl group, a substituted sulfamoyl group, an alkyl-sulfonylamino group, an arylsulfonylamino group, a substituted ureido group or a carboalkoxy group. Further-Gore, the hydroxy group and the amino group included in ~Z~353G
1 the reducing group represented by Ra may be protected by a protective grout capable of reproducing the hydroxy group and the amino group by the action of a nucleophilic agent.
In more preferred embodiments of the resent invention, the reduciny group Ra is represented by the follo~.Jing general formula (X).
C~a I; NH--- (x) X10 Ox 0 wherein Ga represents a hydroxy grout or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; RlaO represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; n represents an integer of 1 to 3; X10 rePresents an electron donating substituent when n is 1 or substituents, which may be the same or different, one of the substituents being an electron donating group and the second or second and third substit-uents being selected from an electron donatina group or a halogen atom when n is 2 or 3, respectivelv; wherein X10 groups may form a condensed ring with each other or ~LZ~53~
1 with ORlaO; and the total number of the carbon atoms included in RlaO and X10 is not less than 8.
Of the reducing grou s represented by the general formula (X), more referred reducing groups Xa are represented by the following general formulae (Xa) and (~b):
Ga B. a --C ~\NXH 2 (xa) I 13 oR,l wherein Ga represents a hydroxy group or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; Rlal and R12, which may be the same or different, each represents an alkyl group or Rlal and Rla2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring; R1a3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group Ra represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; X
and X12, which may be the same or different, each repre-sents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, an acylamino group or an alkylthio group and RlaO and X12 or R10 and ~la3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, ~L2~i36 Ga - (Xb) OR a 1 wherein Ga represents a hydroxy grouP or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; Rla0 represents an al~yl group or an aromatic grouD; x2 represents a hydrogen - atom, an alkyl grout, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, an acylamino grout or an al~ylthio group; and X and Rla may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
Specific examples of the reducing groups represented by the above described general formulae (X3, (Xa) and (Xb) are described in U.S. Patent 4,Q55,428, Japanese Patent Application tOPI) Nos. 12642/81 and 16130/81, respectively.
In other more preferred embodiments of the present invention, the reducing group pa is represented by the following general formula (XI).
Ga ~XI~
.
. s~3~
1 wherein Ga, X10, RlaO and n each has the same meaning as Ga, X10, RlaO and n defilled in the general formula (X).
Of the reducing groups represented by the general formula (XI), more preferred reducing groups Ra are represented by the following general formulae (XIa), (XIb) and (XIc) :
Ga ~NH--R 2a5 )p 24 _ (XIa) R2al--C :R2a3 wherein Ga represents a hvdroxy group or a grout giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; R2al and R2a2, which may be the same or different, each represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group, and R21 and R22 may be bonded to each other to form a ring; R2a3 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic group, R~ represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; R25 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a halogen atom or an acylamino group;
p is 0, 1 or 2; R2a4 and R2a5 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; R21 and R24 may be bonded to ~;2~353~
1 each other-to form a condensed ring; R2al and ~a5 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; and the total number of the carbon atoms included in R2al, R2a2, R a R a and (R a)p is more than 7.
&a ( R 33 ) NH--R a J~J (XIb) CH 2 R 3al wherein Ga represents a hydroxy group or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis, R3al represents an alkyl group or an aromatic grout; R3a2 represents an alkyl group or an aromatic grout; R3a3 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a nalogen atom or an acylamino group; q is 0, 1 or 2; R3a2 and ~3a3 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; ~3al and R3a2 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; R3al and R3a3 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed rin; and the total number of the carbon atoms included in R3al, R3a2 and (R3a3)q is more than 7.
ll.Z~13S36 Ga O t Icy `-T
l wherein Ga represents a hydraxy group or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; R4al represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; R4a2 re resents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group; an arylthio group, a halogen atom or an acylamino group; r is 0, 1 r .
or 2; the group of T-----C- represents a group in which
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to a completely dry image-forming process using a silver halide light-sensitive material. More particularly, the inventionrelates to a process of fixing a color image obtained by heat development on a dye image-fixing layer by heating without using a system containing a solvent.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Since a photographic process using silver halide is excellent in photographic properties such as sensitivity - and gradation control as compared to other photographic processes such as electrophotography and diazo photographic process, the silver halide photographic process has hithér-to been most widely used. Recently, a technique capable of more easily and rapidly obtaining images has been develop-ed by changing an image-forming process of a silver halide photographic material from a conventional wet process such as a process which uses a liquid developer to a dry process such as a developing process which uses heating.
Heat-developable photographic materials are known in this art and the heat-developable materials and image-forming processes using these heat-developable materials are described in, for example, Shahin Kogaku no .. . . .
~Z~3S~6 Kiso (The Basis of Photographic Engineering), pages 553-555, published by Corona K.K. in 1979; Eizo Jooho image Information), page 40, published in April, 1978; Nebletts Handbook of Photography and Reprography, 7th Ed., pages 32-33, (Van Nostrand Reinhold Company); U.S. Patents 3,152,904, 3,301,67&, 3,392,020, 3i457,075; U.K. Patents 1,131,108 and 1,167,777; and Research Disclosure (RD-17029), pages 9-15, June 1978.
Various processes have been proposed for obtain-ing dye images by a dry system. For example, for forming color images by a combination of the oxidation product of a developing agent and a coupler, there are proposed a combination of a p-phenylenediamine reducing agent and a phenolic or active methylene coupler in U.S. Patent 15 3,531,286; p-aminophenol series reducing agents in U.S.
Patent 3,761,270;sulfona~idophenol series reducing agents in Belgian Patent 802,519 and in Research Disclosure, pages 31-32, September 1975; and combination of a sulfonamidophenol series reducing agent and a 4-equivalent 20 coupler in U.S. Patent 4,021,240.
However, in these processes there is a fault that color images become turbid since images of reduced silver and color images are simultaneously formed at light exposed areas after heat development. For overcoming the fault, there are proposed a process of removing ~Z~353~
the silver images by liquid processing and a process of transferring the dyes only to another layer, for example, a sheet having an image-receiving layer. However, there remains a fault that it is not easy to discriminate a dye from the reaction mixture and transfer the dye by itself.
Also, a process of introducing a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic ring group into a dye, forming a silver salt, and liberating the dye by heat development 10 is described in Research Disclosure, (RD-16966), pages 54-58, May~1978. However, in the process it is difficult to control the liberation of the dye at non-exposed areas, whereby a clear image cannot be obtained and hence the foregoing process is unsuitable for general use.
Also, for forming a positive color image by a heat-sensitive silver dye bleaching process, there are described useful dye bleaching processes in Research Disclosure, (RD-14433), pages 30-32, April 1976; ibid.
(RD-15227), pages 14-15, December 1976; U.S. Patent 2Q 4,235,957, etc.
However, these processes have such faults that additional steps and material are required for accelerating the bleaching of dye, for example, it is required to superpose an activating agent sheet on the light-sensitive material and heat the assembly, and also ,, 53`6 color images obtained are gradually bleached by reduction with free silver, e-tc., existing in the light-sensitive material during the preservation of the images for a long period of time.
Furthermore, a process of forming color images by utilizing leuco dyes is described in, for example, U.S. Patents 3,985,565 and 4,022,617. However, in the process it is difficult to stably incorporate leuco dyes in photographic materials, that is, the photographic materials containing leuco dyes are gradually colored when they are preserved.
Some of the inventors previously provided an image-forming process using a novel photosensitive material capable overcoming these faults in the conventional processes (European Patent 0076492). This process is an image--forming process wherein a photosensitive material capable ox releasing a mobile hydrophilic dye is heated in a state containing substantially no water to release the mobile hydrophilic dye and the hydrophil~c dye is trans-Eerred onto a dye-fixing layer mainly in the presence of a solvent.
SUMMARY OF TOE INVENTION
As the result of further making investigations on such a previous invention, the inventors have discovered that an image composed of a mobile hydrophilic dye which is formed by heating in a state containing substantially 3~i~36 no water can be easily transferred by heating without supplying any solvent.
An object of the present invention is, therefore, to provide a process of fixing a hydrophilic dye image formed by heat development, which is performed after or simultaneously with imagewise exposure, on a dye-fixing layer.
Another object of the present invention is to provide a process of forming a hydrophilic dye image having a high quality in a dye-fixing layer by only heating with-out supplying any solvent in the whole of steps using a heat-developable light-sensitive material containing a dye releasing redox compound capable of releasing a mobile hydrophilic dye upon reactionwith a photosensitive silver halide under heating in a state containing substantially no solvent.
A further object of the present invention is to provide a dye-fixing material suited for the image-forming process, which comprises a support having provided thereon one or more layers containing at least a dye-fixing agent, a thermal solvent and a base and/or a base precursor.
That is, the invention relates to a dry image-forming process which comprises heating a light-sensitive material comprising a support having thereon at least a photosensitive silver halide, a binder and a dye releasing 1~35~6 redox compound reductive to the photosensitive silver halide and capable of releasing a mobile hydrophilic dye upon reaction with the photosensitive silver halide under heating, after or simultaneously with imagewise exposure, to form imagewise a mobile hydrophilic dye by the action of the imagewise exposure and heating of the light-sensitive material, after or simultaneously with heat development, in the presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent without particularly supplying a solven-t to transfer the mobile hydrophili.c dye onto a dye-fixing layer to form a dye image which is then fixed.
DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
In the light-sensitive materiaI used in the present invention, an oxidation reduction reaction occurs between the photosensitive silver halide and the reductive dye releasing redox compound with the exposed photosensitive silver halide as a catalyst upon heating in a state contain-- ing substantially no water after or simultaneously with image exposure, whereby an image of a mobile hydrophilic dye released from the dye releasing redox compound, which has become an oxidized product by being oxidized with the silver halide,is obtained together with a silver image at the exposed area.
In the present invention the development step is called "heat development" but it is difficult to 3~
distinguish the released able hydrophilic dye image by the heat development only since the unreacted dye releasing redox compound is co-present. However, in the present invention, since the dye of the dye image obtained is a mobile hydrophilic dye, the dye can be transferred onto a dye-fixing layer in an atmosphere wherein the hydro-philic dye has an affinity, whereby a aye image having excellent image quality and preservative property can be obtained. This step is "dye fixing" step in the invention.
It was already disclosed in European Patent 0076492 that in this case the atmosphere having an affinity with the hydrophilic dye can be realized by mainly supplying a solvent. however t in the present invention, the atmosphere having an affinity with the hydrophilic dye is realiæed by the existence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent and hence, it is not necessary to particulalry supply a solvent. Accordingly, a dye image having a color re-producibility can be formed by a comple-tely dry process without need of supplying a solvent in the whole of steps from light exposure to heat development and dye flxing.
This principle is essentially true in the case of using a negative -type silver halide emulsion and in the case of using an autopositive-type silver halide emulsion as the silver halide emulsion for the light-sensitive material. Therefore, in the case of using an 53~i autopositive-type si.lver halide emulsion, a dye image having a good color reproducibility can be obtained in the same manner as in the case of using a negative-type silver halide emulsion except that in the silver image and the mobile dye image obtained at the unexposed areas, only the dye image is transferred onto the dye-fixing layer.
The oxidation-reduction reaction of a photo-sensitive silver halide and a dye releasing redox compound and the subsequently occurred dye-releasing reaction can take place upon heating in a state containing substantially no solvent. The term "heating" referred to herein means heating to 80C to 250C, and the term "a state containing substantially no water" means that the reacti.on system is in an equilibrium state with moisture in air and hence, water is not supplied for causing the reaction or for accelerating the reaction. Such a state is described in The Theory of the Photographic Process, 4th Edition, page 374, Edited by T. H. James, published by Macmillan.
In the present invention, dyes which are re.leased can be selected by selecting dye releasing redox compounds and therefore, various colors can be reproduced.
Accordingly, by selecting a combination of dye-releasing redox compounds, multicolor images can be obtained, dye images in the invention include not only monochromatic images but also multicolor images, and the monochromatic 3S3~i images include a monochromatic image composed of a mixture of two or more colors.
It has hitherto been considered that the dye releasing reaction is caused by the attack of a so-called nucleophilic reagent and the reaction is usually performed in an aqueous solution having a high pH as higher than lO.
Therefore, it is quite exceptional that a light-sensitive material shows a high reactivity upon mere heating in a state containing substantially no water as the case ox the light-sensitive material used in the invention.
Furthermore, considering from conventlonal knowledges obtained from a wet development at about normal temperature, it is also quite exceptional that the dye releasing redox compound used in the invention can cause an oxidation-reduction reaction with a silver halide wlthout need of the aid of a so-called auxiliary develop-ing agent (see European Patent 0076~92). .
The foregoing reaction proceeds particularl~well when an organic silver salt oxidizing agent is co-present in the reaction system, and a high image density can be obtained. Therefore, it is a particularly preferred embodiment that an organic silver salt oxidizing agent is co-present in the reaction system.
L353~6i 1 The dye releasing re.dox compound which releases a hydrophilic diffusible dye used in the present inven-tion is represented by the following general formula (I):
Ra-S02-D (I) wherein Ra represents a reducing group capable of being oxidized by the silver halide; and D represents an image forming dye portion containing a hydrophilic group.
Preferably the reducing grout Ra in the dye releasing redox compound Ra-S02-D has an oxidation-reduction potential. to a saturated calomel electrode of 1.2 V-or less measuring the polarographic half wave potential using acetonitrile as a solvent and sodium perchlorate as a base electrolyte. Preferred examples of .he reducing grout pa include those represented by the following general formulae tII) to (It).
OH
R~ ~NH--R a a ~II) .
- . .
~Z43536 OH
a :R a -I\ R 3 .
OH / Ra // `~ C \ R2 R a V ) .. . . . . . .. ... .. .. .
1'~4353~i Rl--~NH-- C l ) R2 o Rl NH~
' .-.
~0~ , N - C Yll pa a /NH--NH
R a En a . .
~LZ~3S3 Rl NH--N\N NEI
SIX) .
R a R a 1 wherein Ra, Ra, Ra and Ra each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent selected from an alkyl group, a cyclo-alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy grout, an aryloxy group, an aralkyl grout, an acyl grouD, an acylamino group, an alkylsulfonylamino group, an arylsul~onylamino group, an aryloxyalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an N-substituted carbamoyl grou , an N-substituted sulfamoyl group, a halogen atom, an alkylthio group or an arylthio group. The alkyl ~oietv and the aryl moiety in the above described substituents may be further substituted with an alkoxy grouD, a halogen atomj a hydroxy group, a cyano group, an acyl group, an acylamino group, a substituted carbamoyl group, a substituted sulfamoyl group, an alkyl-sulfonylamino group, an arylsulfonylamino group, a substituted ureido group or a carboalkoxy group. Further-Gore, the hydroxy group and the amino group included in ~Z~353G
1 the reducing group represented by Ra may be protected by a protective grout capable of reproducing the hydroxy group and the amino group by the action of a nucleophilic agent.
In more preferred embodiments of the resent invention, the reduciny group Ra is represented by the follo~.Jing general formula (X).
C~a I; NH--- (x) X10 Ox 0 wherein Ga represents a hydroxy grout or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; RlaO represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; n represents an integer of 1 to 3; X10 rePresents an electron donating substituent when n is 1 or substituents, which may be the same or different, one of the substituents being an electron donating group and the second or second and third substit-uents being selected from an electron donatina group or a halogen atom when n is 2 or 3, respectivelv; wherein X10 groups may form a condensed ring with each other or ~LZ~53~
1 with ORlaO; and the total number of the carbon atoms included in RlaO and X10 is not less than 8.
Of the reducing grou s represented by the general formula (X), more referred reducing groups Xa are represented by the following general formulae (Xa) and (~b):
Ga B. a --C ~\NXH 2 (xa) I 13 oR,l wherein Ga represents a hydroxy group or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; Rlal and R12, which may be the same or different, each represents an alkyl group or Rlal and Rla2 may be bonded to each other to form a ring; R1a3 represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group Ra represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; X
and X12, which may be the same or different, each repre-sents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, an acylamino group or an alkylthio group and RlaO and X12 or R10 and ~la3 may be bonded to each other to form a ring, ~L2~i36 Ga - (Xb) OR a 1 wherein Ga represents a hydroxy grouP or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; Rla0 represents an al~yl group or an aromatic grouD; x2 represents a hydrogen - atom, an alkyl grout, an alkoxy group, a halogen atom, an acylamino grout or an al~ylthio group; and X and Rla may be bonded to each other to form a ring.
Specific examples of the reducing groups represented by the above described general formulae (X3, (Xa) and (Xb) are described in U.S. Patent 4,Q55,428, Japanese Patent Application tOPI) Nos. 12642/81 and 16130/81, respectively.
In other more preferred embodiments of the present invention, the reducing group pa is represented by the following general formula (XI).
Ga ~XI~
.
. s~3~
1 wherein Ga, X10, RlaO and n each has the same meaning as Ga, X10, RlaO and n defilled in the general formula (X).
Of the reducing groups represented by the general formula (XI), more preferred reducing groups Ra are represented by the following general formulae (XIa), (XIb) and (XIc) :
Ga ~NH--R 2a5 )p 24 _ (XIa) R2al--C :R2a3 wherein Ga represents a hvdroxy group or a grout giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; R2al and R2a2, which may be the same or different, each represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group, and R21 and R22 may be bonded to each other to form a ring; R2a3 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an aromatic group, R~ represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; R25 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a halogen atom or an acylamino group;
p is 0, 1 or 2; R2a4 and R2a5 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; R21 and R24 may be bonded to ~;2~353~
1 each other-to form a condensed ring; R2al and ~a5 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; and the total number of the carbon atoms included in R2al, R2a2, R a R a and (R a)p is more than 7.
&a ( R 33 ) NH--R a J~J (XIb) CH 2 R 3al wherein Ga represents a hydroxy group or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis, R3al represents an alkyl group or an aromatic grout; R3a2 represents an alkyl group or an aromatic grout; R3a3 represents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group, an arylthio group, a nalogen atom or an acylamino group; q is 0, 1 or 2; R3a2 and ~3a3 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; ~3al and R3a2 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; R3al and R3a3 may be bonded to each other to form a condensed rin; and the total number of the carbon atoms included in R3al, R3a2 and (R3a3)q is more than 7.
ll.Z~13S36 Ga O t Icy `-T
l wherein Ga represents a hydraxy group or a group giving a hydroxy group upon hydrolysis; R4al represents an alkyl group or an aromatic group; R4a2 re resents an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkylthio group; an arylthio group, a halogen atom or an acylamino group; r is 0, 1 r .
or 2; the group of T-----C- represents a group in which
2 to 4 saturated hydrocarbon rings are condensed, the carbon atom (---C -) in the condensed ring which is -connected to the phenol nucleus (or a precursor thereof), represents a tertiary carbon atom which composes one of the plVOt of the condensed ring, a part of the carbon atoms (excluding the above described tertiary carbon atom) in the hydrocarbon ring may be substituted for oxygen atom(s), the hydrocarbon ring may have a substit-uent, and an aromatic ring may be further condensed to 1 the hydrocarbon ring; R4al or R42 and the group of J .
T-----C- may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; and the total n~ber of the carbon atoms included in R a (R air and the group of O is not less than 7. ~~
Specific examples of the reducing groups repre-sented by the above described general formulae (XI), (XIa), (XIb) and (XIc) are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 16131/81, 650/82 and 4043/82.
The essential part in the groups represented by the general formulae-(III~ and (IV) is a para-(sulfonyl)aminophenol part. Specific examples of these reducing groups are described in U.S. Patents 3,928,312 and 4,076,529, U.S. Published Patent application s 351,673, U.S. Patents 4rl35~g29 and 4,258,120. These groups are also effective for the reducing grouP Ra according to the present invention.
In still other more preferred embodiments of the present inve-ntion, the reducing group Ra is repre-sented by the follo~Jing general formula (XII).
35i3 Ga /~ NH--Go (XII) ,, ,' ,~G1 ~m-1 ) , /
Bal las t 1 wherein Ballast represents a diffusion-resistant graup;
Ga represents a hydroxy grout or a precursor of a hydroxy ~rou?; Ga represents an aromatic ring directly condensed to the benzene nucleus to form a naphthalene nucleus; and n and m are dissimilar positive integers of 1 to 2.
Specific examples of the reducing groups repre-sented by the above described general for~.ula (XII) are described in U.S. Patent 4,053,312.
The reducing aroups represented by the above described general formulae (V~, (VII), (VIII~ and (Ill are characterized by containing a heterocyclic ring.
Specific examples of the groups are described in U.S.
Patent 4,198,235, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) NaO
46730~78 and U.S. Patent 4,273,855.
Specific examples of the reducing groups repre-vented by the general formula (VI) are described in U.S.
Patent 4,149,892.
'~.Z~53~
1 Characteristics required for the reducing group pa are as follows.
1. It is rapidly oxidized by the silver halide to effectively release a diffusible dye for image forma-tion by the function of the dye releasing activator.
2. The reducing group pa has an extensive hydrophobic property, because it is necessary for the dye releasing redox compound to be diffusion-resistant in a hydrophilic or hydrophobic binder an that only the released dye has diffusibility.
T-----C- may be bonded to each other to form a condensed ring; and the total n~ber of the carbon atoms included in R a (R air and the group of O is not less than 7. ~~
Specific examples of the reducing groups repre-sented by the above described general formulae (XI), (XIa), (XIb) and (XIc) are described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 16131/81, 650/82 and 4043/82.
The essential part in the groups represented by the general formulae-(III~ and (IV) is a para-(sulfonyl)aminophenol part. Specific examples of these reducing groups are described in U.S. Patents 3,928,312 and 4,076,529, U.S. Published Patent application s 351,673, U.S. Patents 4rl35~g29 and 4,258,120. These groups are also effective for the reducing grouP Ra according to the present invention.
In still other more preferred embodiments of the present inve-ntion, the reducing group Ra is repre-sented by the follo~Jing general formula (XII).
35i3 Ga /~ NH--Go (XII) ,, ,' ,~G1 ~m-1 ) , /
Bal las t 1 wherein Ballast represents a diffusion-resistant graup;
Ga represents a hydroxy grout or a precursor of a hydroxy ~rou?; Ga represents an aromatic ring directly condensed to the benzene nucleus to form a naphthalene nucleus; and n and m are dissimilar positive integers of 1 to 2.
Specific examples of the reducing groups repre-sented by the above described general for~.ula (XII) are described in U.S. Patent 4,053,312.
The reducing aroups represented by the above described general formulae (V~, (VII), (VIII~ and (Ill are characterized by containing a heterocyclic ring.
Specific examples of the groups are described in U.S.
Patent 4,198,235, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) NaO
46730~78 and U.S. Patent 4,273,855.
Specific examples of the reducing groups repre-vented by the general formula (VI) are described in U.S.
Patent 4,149,892.
'~.Z~53~
1 Characteristics required for the reducing group pa are as follows.
1. It is rapidly oxidized by the silver halide to effectively release a diffusible dye for image forma-tion by the function of the dye releasing activator.
2. The reducing group pa has an extensive hydrophobic property, because it is necessary for the dye releasing redox compound to be diffusion-resistant in a hydrophilic or hydrophobic binder an that only the released dye has diffusibility.
3. It has excellent stabilitv to heat and to the dye releasing activator and does not release the image forming dye until it is oxidized; and
4. It is easily synthesized.
In the following, specific examples of prefer-red reducing grouts Ra which satisfy the above described requirements are shown. In the examples, OH- represents the bond to the dye portion.
OH
NH--1, IJ
.Z~3~ii36 OH
C5Hl l(t) OH
H 3 3 C 1 6 J~3 OH
~NH -H3 3C 16~J
C6Hl 3 OH
~I3 3Cl 60J~NH-- .
~3 . . . ;.
~4L35~1E;
OH
H3 3C~ 60J~NH-CH 3--C--CE~3 C H
OH
H 3 3 C 1 6 Jo CE~2 C --CH3 .
OH
I, NlH--Ho g C 4 Jo' . . .
~353~;
OH
,NH--CH 3--C--CH z--C or CH3 CH3 OCl 6H3 3 NH
OH
~,~, NH
~$~
. .. . . . .. . . ... .
OH
I, NH--CH 3 ~J~ OJCJI 6 H 3 3 OH
~NH--Oc 1 6 l 3 3 OlH
CH3~, NH-CH 3J~
Ocl 6H3 3 OEI , I" I`IH--~1 6~33 3 .
3~3 OH
I, NH--~3 ~Cl8J~
C 4Hg(t) OH
~,CONHCI 6H33 NH--Of Cal ' ' [~,CONHC4H80~ Cs NH--OH
"CONHC3H30CI~HZs NH--. . ... . _ . . . _ . . _ __ _, ...
~Z qL35;~
OH
I,- CON O 1 8H3 7 ) 2 NH--~3" CH
NH -NH--~/\~ OH
C~C ONH(CH2 )30~C5Hl l(t) CsHl l(t) CH30~ ,NfI-- .. , --We CONHC 1 6H3 3 -1~:9L3~i36 CH30~2~40 NH--`,~
CH30,~NH CI8II37 H
1 . Examples of dyes which can be used Eor image forming dye include azo dyes, azomethine dyes, anthra-auinone dyes, na~hthoquinone dyes, stvryl dyes, nitro dyes, quinoline dyes, carbonvl dyes and phthalocyanine dyes, etc. ~e~resentative examples of them are set forth below and are classified by hue. Further, these dyes can be used in a form temporarily shifted to shorter wavelength region which is capable of regeneration during the development processing.
J~3~3 Ye 1 low:
~N=N go N
R5al ~,52 ~N=N4~-OH
R 5l R 52 ~,243~3G
~NH~ / R a R5al NO2 5a2 R Sa ~N=N~o R a HO R a l a R Sa3 ~N=N OH
R a HO
:- . ' .. .. ...
. . .
. .
R 5a4 ON R 5a3 ~R~
R a ON ¦ R a R al 0 5 3 a . I.
N O H=C
.... .... . .. . _..... . ..... _ _ __ O
~,52 R a --C--C--C--NHR a Il 11 11 O N O
~5~' En, 5 21~J~ i~u a OH
,' . .
.. ... _ . . . . .. . . . . . _ . .
1~3~i3ti Magenta:
O R Sal \
=N~
OH N=N~
NH z R Sa2 R 5 3 '' . -..
. _ , . . . . . . . . . . _ ..
_ .. . . .
i3 OH
In the following, specific examples of prefer-red reducing grouts Ra which satisfy the above described requirements are shown. In the examples, OH- represents the bond to the dye portion.
OH
NH--1, IJ
.Z~3~ii36 OH
C5Hl l(t) OH
H 3 3 C 1 6 J~3 OH
~NH -H3 3C 16~J
C6Hl 3 OH
~I3 3Cl 60J~NH-- .
~3 . . . ;.
~4L35~1E;
OH
H3 3C~ 60J~NH-CH 3--C--CE~3 C H
OH
H 3 3 C 1 6 Jo CE~2 C --CH3 .
OH
I, NlH--Ho g C 4 Jo' . . .
~353~;
OH
,NH--CH 3--C--CH z--C or CH3 CH3 OCl 6H3 3 NH
OH
~,~, NH
~$~
. .. . . . .. . . ... .
OH
I, NH--CH 3 ~J~ OJCJI 6 H 3 3 OH
~NH--Oc 1 6 l 3 3 OlH
CH3~, NH-CH 3J~
Ocl 6H3 3 OEI , I" I`IH--~1 6~33 3 .
3~3 OH
I, NH--~3 ~Cl8J~
C 4Hg(t) OH
~,CONHCI 6H33 NH--Of Cal ' ' [~,CONHC4H80~ Cs NH--OH
"CONHC3H30CI~HZs NH--. . ... . _ . . . _ . . _ __ _, ...
~Z qL35;~
OH
I,- CON O 1 8H3 7 ) 2 NH--~3" CH
NH -NH--~/\~ OH
C~C ONH(CH2 )30~C5Hl l(t) CsHl l(t) CH30~ ,NfI-- .. , --We CONHC 1 6H3 3 -1~:9L3~i36 CH30~2~40 NH--`,~
CH30,~NH CI8II37 H
1 . Examples of dyes which can be used Eor image forming dye include azo dyes, azomethine dyes, anthra-auinone dyes, na~hthoquinone dyes, stvryl dyes, nitro dyes, quinoline dyes, carbonvl dyes and phthalocyanine dyes, etc. ~e~resentative examples of them are set forth below and are classified by hue. Further, these dyes can be used in a form temporarily shifted to shorter wavelength region which is capable of regeneration during the development processing.
J~3~3 Ye 1 low:
~N=N go N
R5al ~,52 ~N=N4~-OH
R 5l R 52 ~,243~3G
~NH~ / R a R5al NO2 5a2 R Sa ~N=N~o R a HO R a l a R Sa3 ~N=N OH
R a HO
:- . ' .. .. ...
. . .
. .
R 5a4 ON R 5a3 ~R~
R a ON ¦ R a R al 0 5 3 a . I.
N O H=C
.... .... . .. . _..... . ..... _ _ __ O
~,52 R a --C--C--C--NHR a Il 11 11 O N O
~5~' En, 5 21~J~ i~u a OH
,' . .
.. ... _ . . . . .. . . . . . _ . .
1~3~i3ti Magenta:
O R Sal \
=N~
OH N=N~
NH z R Sa2 R 5 3 '' . -..
. _ , . . . . . . . . . . _ ..
_ .. . . .
i3 OH
5~ Rsa3 R a R r a Abe / R a ON
' R a . . . . . . ... . _ . .. . _ . . .. _ . . _. _ _ .... _ ~3~, -Rsl - 2N ~N=N 4/~N/
- I/ \ :R, 54 a N=N ON\
R5i2XN ~N\R54 R s3 ':~D ~B.5a 0~ .
_ 3G
.. . . .
., .,, . . . . .. . , _ .
~;24; 1536 R a N
/ R sz~3 NH~
En, 5a4 R S
O ~,N~f, O
l - N =N
OH R a cyan:
I, a R 5a4 - OzN~N=N~N/
So ,D 53 a .Ll~ a OH O NHR 5l R 5al R, 5 2 \ /
OH N
R a ~3~ R saz R sa3 N N
R a Jo R 5aS R a JAR a O O
.. . _ . .. . _ .. _ .
a N=N ON
l 52 no a OH O NHR 5l o 2 N ' NH:EI 5a2 R 5a2 R a R 5a~ N=N~N / a :-y R a a O' NH2 .~ ~--R a - R a N ON I:
R a N--C u--N ) ~--R a N I/ N
- OH S NO
N=n~
., , . . ' ' ' . -I . .
... . _ . . _ . _ . . . . _ . .
OH
!~, R 5 R 5a2 N--N I\
a R s4 R ss~ -a R a OH
I' R s 4 R 22 N=N NO 2 s3 R a .
~L243536 1 In the above described formulae, ~5al to RSa~
each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an aryl group, an acylamino grout, an acyl group, a cyano grout, a hydroxyl group, an al~ylsulfonylamino group, an aryl-sulfonylamino group, an al~ylsulfonyl group, a hydroxy-alkyl grQup, a cyanoalkyl group an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryloxyalkyl group, a nitro group, a halogen atom, a sulfamoyl group, an N-substituted sulfamoyl group, a carbamovl group, an N-substituted carbamoyl group, an acyloxyalkyl group, an amino group, a substituted amino group, an alkylthio group or an arylthio grou?. The al..yl moiety and the aryl moiety in the above described substituents may be further substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, a cyano group, an acyl group, an acylamino grout, an alkoxy group, a carbamoyl group, a substituted carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a substituted sulfamoyl aroup, a carboxy group, an al'~ylsulfonvlamino group, an aryl- -sulfonylamino group or a ureido ~rouv.
Examples of the hydrophilic grouns include a hydroxy group, a carboxy grout, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, an imido group, a hydroxamic acid group, a quaternary ammonium grouv, a carbamoyl group, a su~sti-tuted carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a substituted r 42 i~4353~
1 sulfamoyl group, a sulfamoylamino groun; a suhstituted sulfamoylamino group, a ureido grout, a substituted ureido group, an all~oxy group, a hydrox~alkoxy groun, an alkoxyalXoxy grou, etc.
In the present invention, those in which the hydrophilic property thereof is increased by dissociation of a proton under a basic condition are particularly referred. Examples of these grou7s include a nhenolic hydroxy grou?, a carboxy group, a sulfo grout, a phosp'noric acid group, an imido grout, a hvdroxamic acid group, (substituted) sulfamoyl group, a (substituted) sulfamoylamino ~rou~, etc.
Characteristics reauired for the image forming dye are as follows.
1. It has a hue suitable for color renroduction.
2. It has a large molecular extinction coefficient.
3. I;- is fast to light and heat and stable for the dye releasing activator and other addi tives included in the system; and 4. It is e~silv synthesized.
Snecific examples of nreferred imaae forming dyes which satisfy the above described requirements are described in the following. In the examples, H2NSO2-represents a grout necessary to bon to the reducing group.
- ~3 ~2 Ye I 1 ow lH2NSO 2 ~N=N~N ( C 2H4NHSO 2 CH3 )2 CH CN
H2NS 2 N=N~0 NC No \' - NUN I= SO 2NH~OC 2~40C~I3 ~3 SO2M~2 N C N--NH~
N~N~= S02N~2 .
_ _ . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . ... . _ . . ., . . ... _ _ _ .. ..
53~
N C N--NH I) ho' \ N/~ O ce ' .~ .
NO NH~
o ce ..
S 2 NH4~o C 2 EI 4 0 CH 3 S O 2 No 2 , -- 46 -- .
-.
. .
3~3~
H2 NS0 2 ~NH~0--CH3 N o 2 ce H30~=~C~
Il 11' 11 NHSO2~
ce I ce ' SO2NH2 Of ~C=CH~ CH
CE~3 SO 2NH2 [I OH 3--NHS 0,~
.. . . .. . ...
Magen t a oc~3 N=N
SO 2NE~2 oc~3 02N~N=N~N(C2H40H) 2 N HC 4~3 SO 2~HZ
ce ~3~ NUN ( C H40H ) 2 NHC ~3 Il .' I.
_ _ . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . .. ... . . . _ . _. .. .. _ _ -- -- -~;243~36 \~--N~ ON (C 2H40~) 2 OCHzCH2 US 02NH2 O OH
. ce N~OH
C NH~ -H2NSO2~ Jco ce ace , .-ce -- 4~
. . . ' . . -- . .
.. . ... . . . . . ... . _ ... _ . _ .. _ . _ _ ... . .
OH
OH
NH~OCH 3 S O 2 No 2 OH
~SOzN~CzHs)z CH3 302NH N=N~SO 2NH2 OH
SO zN O zHs ) z NH N--N~OC 2H4 OCH3 .
.. ... . ... . . : ... . . _ .. . _ ._.. _ _ . ...
~3~36 OH
I, S 0 2 NHC ,, EI 9 (t3 CH3SO2NH l=N~ S2NH2 , ... . . , . . . ...... . _ ....
~L24~53G
.
Cya n OH Q NHC3H7 (iso) '~3 OH O NHC4Hg (sec) .
N O
OzN N=N~N(C2H4NHS02CH~)2 NHCo4 3 .. . , , . . . .. . . _ . .. . .. _ .. _ _. ,_ ._ . .. ...
. _ .. . .
~L~4~;536 OH
~,,CONHCH2CH2~SO2NH2 N
ce~ce OH
so2CH3 NH N--N ON o 2 .. . . . .... . . . . , . , . . . ... _ .. . .. _ . _ . . _ _. _ _. .. _ .. .
~243~36 OH
. ' S O 2 , .' W ~so2NEI OC2H4OCH3 . .
.
Of ~S02NHC 4H9(t) N H N= N N 2 S 0 z N~lz 1 Specific examples and synthesis examples of the dye releasing redox compound which can be used in the present invention are disclosed in European Patent 0076492.
- 5~
3~3~
1 The dye releasing redox compound used in the present invention can be introduced into a layer of the light-sensitive material by known methods such as a method as described in U.S. Patent 2,322,027. In this case, an organic solvent having a high boiling point or an organic solvent having a low boiling point as described below can be used. For example, the dye releasing redox compound is dispersed in a hydrophilic colloid aftex dissolved in an organic solvent having a high boiling point, for example, a phthalic acid alkyl ester (for example, dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, etc.), a phosphoric acid es'er for example, diphenyl phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, dioctylbutyl phosphate, etc.), a citric acid ester (for example, tributyl acetylcitrate, etc.), a benzoic acid ester (for example, octyl benzoate, etc.), an alkylamide (for example, diethyl laurylamide, etc.), an aliphatic acid ester (for example, dibutoxvethyl succinate, dioctyl azelate, etc.), a trimesic acid ester (for example, tributyl trimesate, etc.), etc., or an organic solvent having a boiling point of about 30C to 160C, or example, a lower alkyl acetate such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, etc., ethyl propionate, secondary butyl alcohol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ~-ethoxyethyl acetate, rnethyl cellosolve acetate, cyclohexanone, etc. The above lZ~36 l described organic solvents having a high boiling oint and organic solvents having a lo boiling point may be used as a mixture thereof Further, it is possible to use a dispersion method using a polymer as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 39853/76 and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 59943/76. moreover, various surface active agents can be used when the dve releasing redox compound - is dispersed in a hydroDhilic colloid. For this purpose, the surface active agents illustrated in other part of the specification can be used.
An amount of the organic solvent having a high boiling point used in the present invention is 10 g per g of the dye releasing redox compound used or less and preferably 5 g per g or less.
. - 56 53~i l The silver halide used in -the present invention includes silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver chloroiodide, silver bromide, silver iodobromide, silver chloroiodobromide and silver iodide, etc.
In the embodiment of the present invention in which the organic silver salt oxidizing agent is not used together with but the silver halide is used alone, particularly preferred silver halide is silver halide partially containing a silver iodide crystal in its particle. That is, the silver halide the X-ray diffrac-tion pattern of which shows that of pure silver iodide is particularly preferred.
In photographic materials a silver halide containing two or more winds of halogen atoms can be used. Such a silver halide vields a completely mixed crysta1 in a conventional silver halide emulsion. For example, the article ox silver iodobromide shows X-ray diffraction pattern at a position corresponding. to the mixed ratio of silver iodide crystal and silver bromide 2Q crystal buy no at a position corresDonding to pure silver iodide crystal and pure silver bromide crystal separately.
Particularly preferred examples of silver halide used in the present invention include silver chloroiodide, silver iodobromide, and silver chloroiodo-53~
1 bromide each containing silver iodide crystal in its particle and showing X-ray diffraction pattern of silver iodide crystal.
The process for preoaring those silver halides is explained taking the case of silver iodobromide.
That is, the silver iodobromide is orepared by first adding silver nitrate solution to potassium bromide solution to form silver bromide oarticles and then adding potassium iodide to the mixture.
Two or more kinds of silver halides in which a particle size and/or a halogen composition are differ-ent each other may be used in mixture.
An average particle size of the silvex halide used in the present invention is preferably from 0.001 em to 10 em and more preferably from 0.001 em to S em.
The silver halide used in the present invention may be used as is. However, it may be chemicallv sensi-tized with a chemical sensitizing agent such as compounds of sulfur, selenium or tellurium, etc., or compounds ox gold, platinum, palladium, rhodium or iridium, etc., a reducing agent such as tin halide, etc., or a combination thereof. The details thereof are described in T.H. James, The Theorv of the PhotograPhic Processj the Fourth Edition, Chapter 5, pages 149 to 169.
~43~;3~
In the present invention a particularly prefer-red embodiment is to use an organic silver salt oxidizing agent in the light-sensitive material. In this case, the silver halide used is not always required to have a feature that the silver halide contains a pure silver iodide crystal in the case of using silver halide solely, but all silver halides used in the field of the art can be used.
The organic silver salt oxidizing agent used in the invention is one which reacts with, when heated at above 80C, preferably at above 100C in the presence of an exposed silver halide, the foregoing image-for~ing material or, if necessary, a reducing agent which exists together with the image-forming material to form a silver image.
As described above, in the present invention the light-sensitive material coloring in higher density can be obtained by using an organic silver salt oxidizing agent together with the silver halide in the light-sensitive material.
Examples of the organic silver salt oxidizing agent are silver salts of organic compounds having a carboxy group and typically silver salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids and silver salts of aromatic carboxylic acids.
Examples of the silver salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids include silver behenate, silver stearate, silver oleate, silver laurate, silver caprate, silver 5~ -~Z~536 1 myristate, silver palmitate, silver maleate, silver fumarate, silver tartarate, silver furoate, silver linolate, silver oleate, silver adipate, silver sehacake, silver succinate, silver acetate, silver butyrate and silver camphorate, etc These silver salts which are substituted with a haloaen atom or a hydroxy group are also effectively used.
Examples of the silver salts of aromatic carboxylic acid and other carboxyl grouP containing compounds include silver benzoate, a silver substituted benzoate such as sllver 3,5-dihy~roxybenzoate, silver o-methylbenzoate, silver m-me-tnylbenzoate, silver p-methyl-benzoate, sil-.7er 2,~-dichlorobenzoate, silver acetamido-benzoate, silver p-phenylbenzoate, etc., silver gallate, silver tanna~e, silver phthalate, silver tere~hthalate, silver salicylate, silver ph-nylacetate, silver pyromellitate, a silver salt of 3-carboxymethyl-4-methyl-4-thiazoline-2-thione, etc., as described in U.S. Patent 3,785,830, and a silver salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid containing a thioether group as described in U.S.
Patent 3,330,663, etc.
In addition, a silver salt of a compound containing a mercapto group or a t~icne group and a derivative thereof can be used.
5;36 1 Examples of these compounds include a silver salt of 3-merca~to-4-phenvl 1,2,4-triazole, a silver - salt of 2-merca~tobenzimidazole, a silver salt of 2-merca~to-5-aminothiadiazole, a silver salt of 2-~ercapto-benzothiazole, a silver salt of 2-(5-ethylglycolamidol-benzothiazole, a silver salt of thioglycolic acid suck as a silver salt o. an S-alkyl thioglycol acetic acid (wherein the alkyl grout his from 12 to 22 carbon atoms as described in Japanese Patent AD~lication (OPI) No.
23221/73, a silver salt of dithiocarboxvlic acid such as a silver salt of dithioacetic acid, a.silver salt of thioamide, a silver salt of 5-carboxyl-1-methyl-2-Phenyl-4-thiopyridine, a silver salt of nerca~totriazine, a silver salt of 2-merca~tobenzoxazole, a silver salt of merca?tooxadiazole, a silver salt as described in U.S.
Patent 4,123,274, for exam le, a silver salt of 1,2,4-merca~totriazole derivative such as a silver salt of 3-amino-5-benzylthio-1,2,4-triazole, a silver salt of thione compound such as a.silver salt of 3-t2-carboxy-ethyl)-4-methyl-4-thiazoline-2-thione as described in U.S. Patent 3,301,678, and the like.
Further, a silver salt of a compound containing an imino grout can be used. Examples of these compounds include a silver salt of benzotriazole and a derivative thereof as described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos.
.
,3~3~
30270/69 and 18416/70~ for example, a silver salt of - benzotriazole, a silver salt of alkyl substituted benzo-triazole such as a silver salt of methylbenzotriazole, etc., a silver salt of a halogen substituted benzotriazole such as a silver salt of S-chlorobenzotriazole, etc., a silver salt of carboimidobenæotriazole such as a silver salt of butylcarboimidobenzotriazole, etc., a silver salt of 1,2,4-triazole or l-H-tetrazole as described in U.S.
Patent 4,220,709, a silver salt of carbazole, a silver salt of saccharin, a silver salt of imidazole and an imidazole derivative, and the like.
In the present invention the silver salts as described in Research Disclosure, Vol. 170, No. 17029 of June, 1978 and organic metal salts such as copper stearate, etc. can be also used as the foregoing various silver salts. The organic silver salt oxidizing agents may be used solely or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
~f~43536 1 on the ?resent invention, if necessary, the so-called auxiliary develooing agent can be used even when the dye releasing redox compound is used. The auxiliary develop-ing agent in -this case is a comound which is oxidized uoon the silver halide to Norm its oxidized product having an ability to oxidize the reducing group Ra in the dye releasing redox comPound.
examples of useful auxiliary developing agents include hydroquinone, alkyl substituted hydroquinones such as tertiary butylhydroquinone, 2,5-dimethylhydro-quinone, etc., catechols, pyrogallols, halogen substituted hydroquinones such as chlorohydroquinone, dichlorohydro-quinone, etc., alkoxy substituted hvdro¢uinones such as methoxyhydroquinone, and polyhydroxybenzene derivatives such as methyl hydroxynaohthalerle, etc. Further, methyl gallate, ascorbic acid, ascorbic acid derivatives, hydroxylamines such as N,N-di~2-ethoxyethyl~hydroxvlamine, etc., pyrazolidones such as l-~henyl-3-~yrazolidone, 4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1-ohenyl 3-pyrazolidone, etc., reductones and hydroxy tetronic acids are useful.
The auxiliary developing agent can be used in an amount of a fixed range. A suitable range is O.OOOS
time by mol to 20 times by mol based Oll silver. A partic-ularly suitable range is 0.001 time by mol to 4 times by mol.
~.'h~3S3~
The heat development mechanism in the present invention upon heating has not yet been sufficiently clarified but is considered as follows.
When the light-sensitive material is exposed to light, a latent image is formed on silver halide having photosensitivity as described in T.H. James, The Theory of the Photographic Process, 3rd Edition, pages 105-148.
Furthermore, when the light-sensitive material is heated, the dye releasing redox compound of the inven-tion acts as a reducing agent to reduce the silver halideand/or the organic silver halide oxidizing agen-t with the latent image nuclei as a catalyst to form silver, and the dye releasing redox compound itself is oxidized. The thus oxidized dye releasing redox compound is cleaved to re-lease a dye. In this case when a nucleophilic agentexists, the dye releasing reaction can be accelerated.
Also, when the organic silver salt oxidizing agent is further used together,it is necessary for quickly initiat-ing the reaction that the silver halide and the organic silver salt oxidizing agent exist within a substantially effective distance from each other. Accordingly, it is preferred that the silver halide and the organic silver halide oxidizing agent exist in the same layer.
In the development by heating a long time is required for finishing -the development reaction since 53~
in this case, the diffusion of the reaction molecules is restricted different from the case of a so-called wet develop-ment. However, too long heating for development is undesir-able since in such a case, the occurrence of the heat re-action at the unexposed areas cannot be disregarded,whereby so-called fog generates.
In the invention a thermal solvent can be used as a means for improving the foregoing inconvenience.
The term "thermal solvent'l means a non-hydrolyzable organic material which is solid at an ambient temperature but melts together with other components at a temperature of heat treatment or below. Preferred examples of thermal solvents include compounds which can act as a solvent for the developing agent and compounds having a high dielectric constant which accelerate physical development of silver salts. Examples of preferred thermal solvents include polyglycols as described in U.S. Patent 3,347,675, for example, polyethylene glycol having an average molecular weight of 1,500 to 20,000, derivatives of polyethylene oxide such as polyethylene oxide oleic acid ester, etc., beeswax, monostearin, compounds having a high dielectric constant which have an -SO2- or -CO- group such as acetamide, succinimide, ethylcarbamate, urea, methylsulfonamide or ethylene carbonate, polar substances as described in U.S.
25 Patent 3,667, 959, lactone of 4-hydroxybutanoic acid, ~Z~353~;
methylsulfinylmethane, tetrahydrothiophene~ dioxide, and l,10-decanediol, methyl anisate and biphenyl suherate as described in Research Disclosure, pages 26 to 28 (Dec., 1976), etc.
The role of the thermal solvent in the invention is not always clear but it is considered that the main role is to accelerate the diffusion of the reaction molecules at development.
~LZ~3s3~
1 The light-sensitive silver halide and the organic silver salt oxidizing agent used in the ?resent invention are prepared in the binder as described below.
Further, the dye releasing redox compound is dispersed in the binder described belot~!.
The binder which can be used in the present invention can be employed indivi.dually or in a combina-tion thereof. A hydrophilic binder con be used as toe binder according to the present invention. The typical hydrophilic binder is a trans?arent or translucent hydro-philic colloid, examples of which include a natural substance, for example, rotein such as gelatin, a gelatin derivative, a cellulose derivative, etc., a polysaccharide such as starch, gum arabic, etc., and a synthetic olymer, for example, a water-soluble polyvinyl compound such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acrylamide polymer, etc. Another example of the synthetic polymer compound is a dispersed vinyl comnound in a latex form which is used for the purpose of increasing dimensional stability of a photographic material.
1 The silver halide u'sed in the present invention can be spectrally sensitized with methine dyes or other dyes. Suitable dyes which can be employed include cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, complex cyanine dyes, complex merocyanine dyes, holooolar cvanine dyes, hemi-cyanine dyes, styryl dyes, and hemioxonol dyes. Of these dyes, cyanine dyes, merocyanine yes and com?lex merocyanine dyes are particularly useful. Anv conven-, tionally utilized nucleus or cyanine dyes, such as basic heterocyclic nuclei, is applicable to these dyes. That is, a pvrroline nucleus, an oxazoline nucleus, a thiazoline nucleus, a pyrrole nucleus, an oxazole nucleus, a thiazole nucleus, a selenazole nucleus, a imidazole nucleus, a tetrazole nucleus, a oyridine nucleus, etc., and further, nuclei formed by condensîng alicyclic hydrocarbon rings with these nuclei an nuclei formed by condensing aro~a'ic hydrocarbon rings with these nuclei, that is, an indolenine nucleus, a benz--indolenine nucleus, an indole nucleus, a ~enzoxazole nucleus, a naohthoxazole nucleus, a benzothiazole nucleus, a naphthothiazole nucleus, a benzoselenazole nucleus, a ~enzimidazole nucleus, a ~uinoline nucleus, etc., are anprooriate. The carbon atoms,of these nuclei may also be substituted.
35j3~;
1 To meroc~anine dyes and complex merocyanine dyes, as nuclei having a ~etome-thylene structure, 5-- or
' R a . . . . . . ... . _ . .. . _ . . .. _ . . _. _ _ .... _ ~3~, -Rsl - 2N ~N=N 4/~N/
- I/ \ :R, 54 a N=N ON\
R5i2XN ~N\R54 R s3 ':~D ~B.5a 0~ .
_ 3G
.. . . .
., .,, . . . . .. . , _ .
~;24; 1536 R a N
/ R sz~3 NH~
En, 5a4 R S
O ~,N~f, O
l - N =N
OH R a cyan:
I, a R 5a4 - OzN~N=N~N/
So ,D 53 a .Ll~ a OH O NHR 5l R 5al R, 5 2 \ /
OH N
R a ~3~ R saz R sa3 N N
R a Jo R 5aS R a JAR a O O
.. . _ . .. . _ .. _ .
a N=N ON
l 52 no a OH O NHR 5l o 2 N ' NH:EI 5a2 R 5a2 R a R 5a~ N=N~N / a :-y R a a O' NH2 .~ ~--R a - R a N ON I:
R a N--C u--N ) ~--R a N I/ N
- OH S NO
N=n~
., , . . ' ' ' . -I . .
... . _ . . _ . _ . . . . _ . .
OH
!~, R 5 R 5a2 N--N I\
a R s4 R ss~ -a R a OH
I' R s 4 R 22 N=N NO 2 s3 R a .
~L243536 1 In the above described formulae, ~5al to RSa~
each represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent selected from an alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, an aryl group, an acylamino grout, an acyl group, a cyano grout, a hydroxyl group, an al~ylsulfonylamino group, an aryl-sulfonylamino group, an al~ylsulfonyl group, a hydroxy-alkyl grQup, a cyanoalkyl group an alkoxycarbonylalkyl group, an alkoxyalkyl group, an aryloxyalkyl group, a nitro group, a halogen atom, a sulfamoyl group, an N-substituted sulfamoyl group, a carbamovl group, an N-substituted carbamoyl group, an acyloxyalkyl group, an amino group, a substituted amino group, an alkylthio group or an arylthio grou?. The al..yl moiety and the aryl moiety in the above described substituents may be further substituted with a halogen atom, a hydroxy group, a cyano group, an acyl group, an acylamino grout, an alkoxy group, a carbamoyl group, a substituted carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a substituted sulfamoyl aroup, a carboxy group, an al'~ylsulfonvlamino group, an aryl- -sulfonylamino group or a ureido ~rouv.
Examples of the hydrophilic grouns include a hydroxy group, a carboxy grout, a sulfo group, a phosphoric acid group, an imido group, a hydroxamic acid group, a quaternary ammonium grouv, a carbamoyl group, a su~sti-tuted carbamoyl group, a sulfamoyl group, a substituted r 42 i~4353~
1 sulfamoyl group, a sulfamoylamino groun; a suhstituted sulfamoylamino group, a ureido grout, a substituted ureido group, an all~oxy group, a hydrox~alkoxy groun, an alkoxyalXoxy grou, etc.
In the present invention, those in which the hydrophilic property thereof is increased by dissociation of a proton under a basic condition are particularly referred. Examples of these grou7s include a nhenolic hydroxy grou?, a carboxy group, a sulfo grout, a phosp'noric acid group, an imido grout, a hvdroxamic acid group, (substituted) sulfamoyl group, a (substituted) sulfamoylamino ~rou~, etc.
Characteristics reauired for the image forming dye are as follows.
1. It has a hue suitable for color renroduction.
2. It has a large molecular extinction coefficient.
3. I;- is fast to light and heat and stable for the dye releasing activator and other addi tives included in the system; and 4. It is e~silv synthesized.
Snecific examples of nreferred imaae forming dyes which satisfy the above described requirements are described in the following. In the examples, H2NSO2-represents a grout necessary to bon to the reducing group.
- ~3 ~2 Ye I 1 ow lH2NSO 2 ~N=N~N ( C 2H4NHSO 2 CH3 )2 CH CN
H2NS 2 N=N~0 NC No \' - NUN I= SO 2NH~OC 2~40C~I3 ~3 SO2M~2 N C N--NH~
N~N~= S02N~2 .
_ _ . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . ... . _ . . ., . . ... _ _ _ .. ..
53~
N C N--NH I) ho' \ N/~ O ce ' .~ .
NO NH~
o ce ..
S 2 NH4~o C 2 EI 4 0 CH 3 S O 2 No 2 , -- 46 -- .
-.
. .
3~3~
H2 NS0 2 ~NH~0--CH3 N o 2 ce H30~=~C~
Il 11' 11 NHSO2~
ce I ce ' SO2NH2 Of ~C=CH~ CH
CE~3 SO 2NH2 [I OH 3--NHS 0,~
.. . . .. . ...
Magen t a oc~3 N=N
SO 2NE~2 oc~3 02N~N=N~N(C2H40H) 2 N HC 4~3 SO 2~HZ
ce ~3~ NUN ( C H40H ) 2 NHC ~3 Il .' I.
_ _ . . . . ... . . .. . . . . . .. ... . . . _ . _. .. .. _ _ -- -- -~;243~36 \~--N~ ON (C 2H40~) 2 OCHzCH2 US 02NH2 O OH
. ce N~OH
C NH~ -H2NSO2~ Jco ce ace , .-ce -- 4~
. . . ' . . -- . .
.. . ... . . . . . ... . _ ... _ . _ .. _ . _ _ ... . .
OH
OH
NH~OCH 3 S O 2 No 2 OH
~SOzN~CzHs)z CH3 302NH N=N~SO 2NH2 OH
SO zN O zHs ) z NH N--N~OC 2H4 OCH3 .
.. ... . ... . . : ... . . _ .. . _ ._.. _ _ . ...
~3~36 OH
I, S 0 2 NHC ,, EI 9 (t3 CH3SO2NH l=N~ S2NH2 , ... . . , . . . ...... . _ ....
~L24~53G
.
Cya n OH Q NHC3H7 (iso) '~3 OH O NHC4Hg (sec) .
N O
OzN N=N~N(C2H4NHS02CH~)2 NHCo4 3 .. . , , . . . .. . . _ . .. . .. _ .. _ _. ,_ ._ . .. ...
. _ .. . .
~L~4~;536 OH
~,,CONHCH2CH2~SO2NH2 N
ce~ce OH
so2CH3 NH N--N ON o 2 .. . . . .... . . . . , . , . . . ... _ .. . .. _ . _ . . _ _. _ _. .. _ .. .
~243~36 OH
. ' S O 2 , .' W ~so2NEI OC2H4OCH3 . .
.
Of ~S02NHC 4H9(t) N H N= N N 2 S 0 z N~lz 1 Specific examples and synthesis examples of the dye releasing redox compound which can be used in the present invention are disclosed in European Patent 0076492.
- 5~
3~3~
1 The dye releasing redox compound used in the present invention can be introduced into a layer of the light-sensitive material by known methods such as a method as described in U.S. Patent 2,322,027. In this case, an organic solvent having a high boiling point or an organic solvent having a low boiling point as described below can be used. For example, the dye releasing redox compound is dispersed in a hydrophilic colloid aftex dissolved in an organic solvent having a high boiling point, for example, a phthalic acid alkyl ester (for example, dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl phthalate, etc.), a phosphoric acid es'er for example, diphenyl phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phosphate, dioctylbutyl phosphate, etc.), a citric acid ester (for example, tributyl acetylcitrate, etc.), a benzoic acid ester (for example, octyl benzoate, etc.), an alkylamide (for example, diethyl laurylamide, etc.), an aliphatic acid ester (for example, dibutoxvethyl succinate, dioctyl azelate, etc.), a trimesic acid ester (for example, tributyl trimesate, etc.), etc., or an organic solvent having a boiling point of about 30C to 160C, or example, a lower alkyl acetate such as ethyl acetate, butyl acetate, etc., ethyl propionate, secondary butyl alcohol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ~-ethoxyethyl acetate, rnethyl cellosolve acetate, cyclohexanone, etc. The above lZ~36 l described organic solvents having a high boiling oint and organic solvents having a lo boiling point may be used as a mixture thereof Further, it is possible to use a dispersion method using a polymer as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 39853/76 and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 59943/76. moreover, various surface active agents can be used when the dve releasing redox compound - is dispersed in a hydroDhilic colloid. For this purpose, the surface active agents illustrated in other part of the specification can be used.
An amount of the organic solvent having a high boiling point used in the present invention is 10 g per g of the dye releasing redox compound used or less and preferably 5 g per g or less.
. - 56 53~i l The silver halide used in -the present invention includes silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver chloroiodide, silver bromide, silver iodobromide, silver chloroiodobromide and silver iodide, etc.
In the embodiment of the present invention in which the organic silver salt oxidizing agent is not used together with but the silver halide is used alone, particularly preferred silver halide is silver halide partially containing a silver iodide crystal in its particle. That is, the silver halide the X-ray diffrac-tion pattern of which shows that of pure silver iodide is particularly preferred.
In photographic materials a silver halide containing two or more winds of halogen atoms can be used. Such a silver halide vields a completely mixed crysta1 in a conventional silver halide emulsion. For example, the article ox silver iodobromide shows X-ray diffraction pattern at a position corresponding. to the mixed ratio of silver iodide crystal and silver bromide 2Q crystal buy no at a position corresDonding to pure silver iodide crystal and pure silver bromide crystal separately.
Particularly preferred examples of silver halide used in the present invention include silver chloroiodide, silver iodobromide, and silver chloroiodo-53~
1 bromide each containing silver iodide crystal in its particle and showing X-ray diffraction pattern of silver iodide crystal.
The process for preoaring those silver halides is explained taking the case of silver iodobromide.
That is, the silver iodobromide is orepared by first adding silver nitrate solution to potassium bromide solution to form silver bromide oarticles and then adding potassium iodide to the mixture.
Two or more kinds of silver halides in which a particle size and/or a halogen composition are differ-ent each other may be used in mixture.
An average particle size of the silvex halide used in the present invention is preferably from 0.001 em to 10 em and more preferably from 0.001 em to S em.
The silver halide used in the present invention may be used as is. However, it may be chemicallv sensi-tized with a chemical sensitizing agent such as compounds of sulfur, selenium or tellurium, etc., or compounds ox gold, platinum, palladium, rhodium or iridium, etc., a reducing agent such as tin halide, etc., or a combination thereof. The details thereof are described in T.H. James, The Theorv of the PhotograPhic Processj the Fourth Edition, Chapter 5, pages 149 to 169.
~43~;3~
In the present invention a particularly prefer-red embodiment is to use an organic silver salt oxidizing agent in the light-sensitive material. In this case, the silver halide used is not always required to have a feature that the silver halide contains a pure silver iodide crystal in the case of using silver halide solely, but all silver halides used in the field of the art can be used.
The organic silver salt oxidizing agent used in the invention is one which reacts with, when heated at above 80C, preferably at above 100C in the presence of an exposed silver halide, the foregoing image-for~ing material or, if necessary, a reducing agent which exists together with the image-forming material to form a silver image.
As described above, in the present invention the light-sensitive material coloring in higher density can be obtained by using an organic silver salt oxidizing agent together with the silver halide in the light-sensitive material.
Examples of the organic silver salt oxidizing agent are silver salts of organic compounds having a carboxy group and typically silver salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids and silver salts of aromatic carboxylic acids.
Examples of the silver salts of aliphatic carboxylic acids include silver behenate, silver stearate, silver oleate, silver laurate, silver caprate, silver 5~ -~Z~536 1 myristate, silver palmitate, silver maleate, silver fumarate, silver tartarate, silver furoate, silver linolate, silver oleate, silver adipate, silver sehacake, silver succinate, silver acetate, silver butyrate and silver camphorate, etc These silver salts which are substituted with a haloaen atom or a hydroxy group are also effectively used.
Examples of the silver salts of aromatic carboxylic acid and other carboxyl grouP containing compounds include silver benzoate, a silver substituted benzoate such as sllver 3,5-dihy~roxybenzoate, silver o-methylbenzoate, silver m-me-tnylbenzoate, silver p-methyl-benzoate, sil-.7er 2,~-dichlorobenzoate, silver acetamido-benzoate, silver p-phenylbenzoate, etc., silver gallate, silver tanna~e, silver phthalate, silver tere~hthalate, silver salicylate, silver ph-nylacetate, silver pyromellitate, a silver salt of 3-carboxymethyl-4-methyl-4-thiazoline-2-thione, etc., as described in U.S. Patent 3,785,830, and a silver salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid containing a thioether group as described in U.S.
Patent 3,330,663, etc.
In addition, a silver salt of a compound containing a mercapto group or a t~icne group and a derivative thereof can be used.
5;36 1 Examples of these compounds include a silver salt of 3-merca~to-4-phenvl 1,2,4-triazole, a silver - salt of 2-merca~tobenzimidazole, a silver salt of 2-merca~to-5-aminothiadiazole, a silver salt of 2-~ercapto-benzothiazole, a silver salt of 2-(5-ethylglycolamidol-benzothiazole, a silver salt of thioglycolic acid suck as a silver salt o. an S-alkyl thioglycol acetic acid (wherein the alkyl grout his from 12 to 22 carbon atoms as described in Japanese Patent AD~lication (OPI) No.
23221/73, a silver salt of dithiocarboxvlic acid such as a silver salt of dithioacetic acid, a.silver salt of thioamide, a silver salt of 5-carboxyl-1-methyl-2-Phenyl-4-thiopyridine, a silver salt of nerca~totriazine, a silver salt of 2-merca~tobenzoxazole, a silver salt of merca?tooxadiazole, a silver salt as described in U.S.
Patent 4,123,274, for exam le, a silver salt of 1,2,4-merca~totriazole derivative such as a silver salt of 3-amino-5-benzylthio-1,2,4-triazole, a silver salt of thione compound such as a.silver salt of 3-t2-carboxy-ethyl)-4-methyl-4-thiazoline-2-thione as described in U.S. Patent 3,301,678, and the like.
Further, a silver salt of a compound containing an imino grout can be used. Examples of these compounds include a silver salt of benzotriazole and a derivative thereof as described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos.
.
,3~3~
30270/69 and 18416/70~ for example, a silver salt of - benzotriazole, a silver salt of alkyl substituted benzo-triazole such as a silver salt of methylbenzotriazole, etc., a silver salt of a halogen substituted benzotriazole such as a silver salt of S-chlorobenzotriazole, etc., a silver salt of carboimidobenæotriazole such as a silver salt of butylcarboimidobenzotriazole, etc., a silver salt of 1,2,4-triazole or l-H-tetrazole as described in U.S.
Patent 4,220,709, a silver salt of carbazole, a silver salt of saccharin, a silver salt of imidazole and an imidazole derivative, and the like.
In the present invention the silver salts as described in Research Disclosure, Vol. 170, No. 17029 of June, 1978 and organic metal salts such as copper stearate, etc. can be also used as the foregoing various silver salts. The organic silver salt oxidizing agents may be used solely or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
~f~43536 1 on the ?resent invention, if necessary, the so-called auxiliary develooing agent can be used even when the dye releasing redox compound is used. The auxiliary develop-ing agent in -this case is a comound which is oxidized uoon the silver halide to Norm its oxidized product having an ability to oxidize the reducing group Ra in the dye releasing redox comPound.
examples of useful auxiliary developing agents include hydroquinone, alkyl substituted hydroquinones such as tertiary butylhydroquinone, 2,5-dimethylhydro-quinone, etc., catechols, pyrogallols, halogen substituted hydroquinones such as chlorohydroquinone, dichlorohydro-quinone, etc., alkoxy substituted hvdro¢uinones such as methoxyhydroquinone, and polyhydroxybenzene derivatives such as methyl hydroxynaohthalerle, etc. Further, methyl gallate, ascorbic acid, ascorbic acid derivatives, hydroxylamines such as N,N-di~2-ethoxyethyl~hydroxvlamine, etc., pyrazolidones such as l-~henyl-3-~yrazolidone, 4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-1-ohenyl 3-pyrazolidone, etc., reductones and hydroxy tetronic acids are useful.
The auxiliary developing agent can be used in an amount of a fixed range. A suitable range is O.OOOS
time by mol to 20 times by mol based Oll silver. A partic-ularly suitable range is 0.001 time by mol to 4 times by mol.
~.'h~3S3~
The heat development mechanism in the present invention upon heating has not yet been sufficiently clarified but is considered as follows.
When the light-sensitive material is exposed to light, a latent image is formed on silver halide having photosensitivity as described in T.H. James, The Theory of the Photographic Process, 3rd Edition, pages 105-148.
Furthermore, when the light-sensitive material is heated, the dye releasing redox compound of the inven-tion acts as a reducing agent to reduce the silver halideand/or the organic silver halide oxidizing agen-t with the latent image nuclei as a catalyst to form silver, and the dye releasing redox compound itself is oxidized. The thus oxidized dye releasing redox compound is cleaved to re-lease a dye. In this case when a nucleophilic agentexists, the dye releasing reaction can be accelerated.
Also, when the organic silver salt oxidizing agent is further used together,it is necessary for quickly initiat-ing the reaction that the silver halide and the organic silver salt oxidizing agent exist within a substantially effective distance from each other. Accordingly, it is preferred that the silver halide and the organic silver halide oxidizing agent exist in the same layer.
In the development by heating a long time is required for finishing -the development reaction since 53~
in this case, the diffusion of the reaction molecules is restricted different from the case of a so-called wet develop-ment. However, too long heating for development is undesir-able since in such a case, the occurrence of the heat re-action at the unexposed areas cannot be disregarded,whereby so-called fog generates.
In the invention a thermal solvent can be used as a means for improving the foregoing inconvenience.
The term "thermal solvent'l means a non-hydrolyzable organic material which is solid at an ambient temperature but melts together with other components at a temperature of heat treatment or below. Preferred examples of thermal solvents include compounds which can act as a solvent for the developing agent and compounds having a high dielectric constant which accelerate physical development of silver salts. Examples of preferred thermal solvents include polyglycols as described in U.S. Patent 3,347,675, for example, polyethylene glycol having an average molecular weight of 1,500 to 20,000, derivatives of polyethylene oxide such as polyethylene oxide oleic acid ester, etc., beeswax, monostearin, compounds having a high dielectric constant which have an -SO2- or -CO- group such as acetamide, succinimide, ethylcarbamate, urea, methylsulfonamide or ethylene carbonate, polar substances as described in U.S.
25 Patent 3,667, 959, lactone of 4-hydroxybutanoic acid, ~Z~353~;
methylsulfinylmethane, tetrahydrothiophene~ dioxide, and l,10-decanediol, methyl anisate and biphenyl suherate as described in Research Disclosure, pages 26 to 28 (Dec., 1976), etc.
The role of the thermal solvent in the invention is not always clear but it is considered that the main role is to accelerate the diffusion of the reaction molecules at development.
~LZ~3s3~
1 The light-sensitive silver halide and the organic silver salt oxidizing agent used in the ?resent invention are prepared in the binder as described below.
Further, the dye releasing redox compound is dispersed in the binder described belot~!.
The binder which can be used in the present invention can be employed indivi.dually or in a combina-tion thereof. A hydrophilic binder con be used as toe binder according to the present invention. The typical hydrophilic binder is a trans?arent or translucent hydro-philic colloid, examples of which include a natural substance, for example, rotein such as gelatin, a gelatin derivative, a cellulose derivative, etc., a polysaccharide such as starch, gum arabic, etc., and a synthetic olymer, for example, a water-soluble polyvinyl compound such as polyvinyl pyrrolidone, acrylamide polymer, etc. Another example of the synthetic polymer compound is a dispersed vinyl comnound in a latex form which is used for the purpose of increasing dimensional stability of a photographic material.
1 The silver halide u'sed in the present invention can be spectrally sensitized with methine dyes or other dyes. Suitable dyes which can be employed include cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, complex cyanine dyes, complex merocyanine dyes, holooolar cvanine dyes, hemi-cyanine dyes, styryl dyes, and hemioxonol dyes. Of these dyes, cyanine dyes, merocyanine yes and com?lex merocyanine dyes are particularly useful. Anv conven-, tionally utilized nucleus or cyanine dyes, such as basic heterocyclic nuclei, is applicable to these dyes. That is, a pvrroline nucleus, an oxazoline nucleus, a thiazoline nucleus, a pyrrole nucleus, an oxazole nucleus, a thiazole nucleus, a selenazole nucleus, a imidazole nucleus, a tetrazole nucleus, a oyridine nucleus, etc., and further, nuclei formed by condensîng alicyclic hydrocarbon rings with these nuclei an nuclei formed by condensing aro~a'ic hydrocarbon rings with these nuclei, that is, an indolenine nucleus, a benz--indolenine nucleus, an indole nucleus, a ~enzoxazole nucleus, a naohthoxazole nucleus, a benzothiazole nucleus, a naphthothiazole nucleus, a benzoselenazole nucleus, a ~enzimidazole nucleus, a ~uinoline nucleus, etc., are anprooriate. The carbon atoms,of these nuclei may also be substituted.
35j3~;
1 To meroc~anine dyes and complex merocyanine dyes, as nuclei having a ~etome-thylene structure, 5-- or
6-me~ered ;~eterocyclic nuclei such as a ~yrazolin-5-one nucleus, a thiohydantoin nucleus, a 2-thiooxazolidin-2,4-dione nucleus, a thiazolidin-2,4--dione nucleus, a rhodanine nucleus, a thlobarbituric acid nucleus, etc., may also be applicable.
Useful sensitizina dyes include those described in German Patent 929,080, U.S. Patents 2,231,65~, 2,493,748, 2,503,776, 2,519,001, 2,912,329, 3,655,959, 3,672,897, 3,634,217, 4,025,349 and 4,046,572, British Patent 1,242,588, Japanese Patent Publication Nos.
14030~69 and 24844/77, etc.
These sen~;itizing dves can be em~loved individually, and call also be em~loved in combination thereof. A combination of sensitizing dyes is often used, particularly for the purpose of supersensitization.
representative examples thereof are describe in U.S. Patents 2,683,545, 2,977,229, 3,397,060, 3,522,052, 3,527,641, 3,ol7,233, 3,628,964, 3,666,4~0, 3,o72,898, 3,679,42~, 3,703,377, 3,769,301, 3,~14,609, 3,837,8O2 and 4,026,707, British Patents 1,344,281 and 1,507,803, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 4936/68 and 12375/78, Japanese Patent hDplication IOPI) Nos.
110618/77 and 109925/77, etc.
~43~36 The sensitizing dyes may be present in the emulsion together with dyes which themselves do not give rise to spectrally sensitizing effects but exhibit a supersensitizing effect or materials which do not sub-stantially absorb visible light bu-t exhibit a super-sensitizing effect. For example, aminostilbene compounds substituted wi-th a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group (e.g., those described in U.S. Patents 2,933,390 and 3,635,721), aromatic organic acid-formaldehyde condensates (e.g., those described in U.S. Patent 3,7~3,510), cadmium salts, azaindene compounds, etc., can be present.
The combinations described in U.S. Patents 3,615,613, 3,615,641, 3,617,295 and 3,635,721 are particularly useful.
In the invention various dye releasing activators can be used by various manners, for example, by incorporat-ing them in any one of the layers of the light-sensitive material or the dye-ixing material. The dye releasing activator is a compound capable of accelerating the oxidat-ion-reduction of the photosensitive silver halide and/or the organic silver salt oxidizing agent with the dye releasing redox compound or capable of nucleophilically reacting with the oxidized dye releasing redox compound in the subsequent dye releasing reaction to accelerate the release of dye. Bases or base precursors are useful as the dye releasing activators. In the invention it is ~2~536 particularly advantageous for accelerating the reaction to use these dye releasing activators, but in the case of incorporating the dye releasing activators in the light-sensitive material, it is necessary to select the dye releasing activator which does not reduce the preservative property of the light sensitive material. Examples of preferred bases are amines which include trialkylamines, hydroxylamines, aliphatic polyamines, N-alkyl substituted aromatic amines, N-hydroxyalkyl substituted aromatic amines and bis[p-(dialkylamino)phenyl]methanes. Further, there are betaine tetramethylammonium iodide and diaminobutane dihydrochloride as described in U.S. Patent 2,410,644, and urea and organic compounds including amino acids such as 6-aminocaproic acid as described in U.5. Patent 3,506,444.
The base precursor is a substance which releases a basic component by heating. Examples ox typical base precursors are described in British Patent 998,949. A preferred base precursor is a salt of a carboxylic acid and an organic base, and examples of the suitable carboxylic acids include trichloroacetic acid and trifluoroacetic acid and examples of the suitable bases include guanidine, piperidine, morpholine, p-toluidine and 2-picoline, etc. Guanldine trichloroacetate as described in U.S. Patent 3,220,~46 is particularly preferred. Further, aldonic amides as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 22625/75 are ~3536 1 preferably used because they decompose at-a high temperature to form bases.
These dye releasing activators can be used in an amount of a broad range. A useful range is up to 50%
by weight based on the amount of a dry layer coated of the light-sensitive material. A range of 0~01% by weight to 40~ by weight is more preerred.
It is advantageous to use a compound repre-sented by the general formula described below in the heat-developable color photographic maLerial in order to accelerate development and accelerate release of a dve.
.: .
l N-SO -N 3 (A) wherein Al, A2, A3 and A4, which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atop or a substit-uent selected from an alkyl group, a suhstituted alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted aryl group and a heterocyclic group;
and Al and A2 or A3 and A4 may combine with each other to form a ring.- -.
3~i3~
1 Specific examples of the compounds include H NSO2NH2~ ~2NSO2N(cH3~2, H2Nso2N(c2~5)2~ 2 2 3 H2NSO2N(C2H4OH)2 CH3N~SO2 3 C 2 2 The above described compound can be used in an amount of broad range. useful range is up to 20% by weight based on the amount of a dry layer coated of the light-sensitive material. A range of 0.1% by weight to 15% by welght is more preferred.
It iS advantageous to use a water releasing compound in the present invention in order to accelerate the dye rele~sin~ reaction.
The water releasing compound means a compound which releases water by decomposition during heat develop-ment. These compounds are particularly known in the field of printing of fahrics, and NH4Fe(SO~)2 12H2O, etc., as described in Japanese Patent Application lOPI) No. 88386/75 are use-Eul.
A support used in the present invention is that which can enc~ure at the processing temperature. As an ordinary support, not only glass, paper, metal or analogues thereof may be used, but also an ace-tyl cellulose film, a cellulose ester film,a polyvinyl acetal film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, a polyethylene terephthalate 'l'h'~353~
film, and a film related thereto or a plastic material may by used. The polyesters described in U.S. Patents 3,634,089 and 3,725,070 are preferably used.
A coating composition used in the invention can be prepared by blending, before use, a silver halide and an organic metal salt oxidizing agent formed separately, and it is also effective for the preparation of the coat-ing composition to blend both the components in a ball mill for a long period of time. It is also effective to I0 add a halogen-containing compound to the organic silver salt oxidizing agent to form a silver halide with silver in the organic silver salt oxidizing agent.
Method of preparing these silver halide and organic silver salt oxidizing agents and manners of blend-ing them are described in Research Disclosure, No. 17029, Japanese Patent Application (OPI~ Nos. 32928/75 and 42529/76, U.S. Patent 3,700,458, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 13224/74 and 17216/75.
A suitable coating amount of the light-sensitive silver halide and the organic silver salt oxidizing agent employed in the present invention is in a total of prom 50 mg/m2 to 10 g/m2 calculated as an amount of silver.
.
f~3~53~
1 The pho'ographic emulsion layer and other hydrophilic colloid layers in the light-sensitive material of the present invention may contain various surface active agents for various purposes, for example, as coating aids or for prevention of electrically charging, improvement of lubricating property, emulsifi-cation, prevention of adhesion, improvement of photo-graphic properties for example, acceleration of development, rendering hard tone or sensitization), etc.
For example, it is possible to use nonionic surface active agents such as saponin (steroid), alkylene oxide derivatives (or example, polyethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol/polypropylene glycol condensates, polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers or polyethylene glycol alkylaryl ethers, polyethylene glycol esters, poly-ethvlene glycol sorbitan esters, polyalkylene glycol al~ylamine or amides, polyethvlene oxide adducts of silicone, etc.), glycidol derivatives (for example, alkenylsuccinic acid polyglycerides, alkylphenol poly-glycerides, etc.), polyhydric alcohol aliphatic acid esters or saccharide alkyl esters, etc.; anionic surface active agents containing acid groups such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phospho group, a sulfate group, a phosphate group, etc., such as alkylcarboxylic acid salts, alkylsulfonic acid salts, alkylbenzenesulfonic 3~3~
1 acid salts; alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts, alkyl sulfuric acid esters, alkylphosphoric acid esters, N-acyl-~-alkyltaurines, sulfosuccinic acid esters, sulfo-alkyl polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkylphosphoric acid esters, etc.; am~holytic surface active agents such as amino acids, aminoalkylsulfonic acids, aminoalkylsulfuric acid esters or phosphoric acid esters, alkylbetaines, amine oxides, etc.; and cationic surface active agents such as alkylamine salts, aliphatic or aromatic quaternary ammonium salts, heterocyclic quaternary ammonium salts such as pyridinium salts, , imidazolium salts, etc., aliphatic or heterocyclic phosphonium salts, aliphatic or heterocyclic sul~onium - salts, etc.
Of the above-described suxface active agents, polyethylene glycol type nonionic surface active agents having a recurring unit of ethylene oxide in their molecules may be preferably incorporated into the light-sensitive matexial. It is particularly preferred that the molecule contains 5 or more of the recurring units of ethylene oxide.
The nonionic surface active agents capable of satisfying the above described conditions are well known as to their structures, proper-ties and methods of synthesis. These nonionic surface active agents are L~3536 1 widely used even outside this field. Representative references relating to these agents include: Surfactant Science Series, Vol. 1, Nonionic Surfactants (edited by Martin I. Schick, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1967), and Surface Active Ethylene Oxide Adducts, (edited by Schoufeldt N
Pergamon Press, 1969). Among the nonionlc surface active agents described in the above mentioned references, those capable of satisfying the above described condi tions are preferably employed in connection with the present invention.
The nonionic surface active agents can be used individually or as a mixture of two or more of them.
The polyethylene glycol type nonionic surface active agents can be used in an amount of less than 100%
by weight, preferably less than 50% by weiqht, based on a hydrophilic binder.
The liqtlt-sensitive material of the present invention may contain a cationic compound containing a pyridinium salt. Examples of the cationic compounds containing a pyridinium group used are described in PSA Journal Section B 36 (1953), U.S. Patents 2,648,604 and 3,671,247, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 30074/69 and 9503/69, etc.
~35,3G
1 Further, in the present invention, it is possible to use a compound which activates development simultaneously ~Ihile stabilizing the image. Particular ly, it is preferred to use isothiuroniums including 2-hydroxyethylisothiuronium trichloroacetate as described in U.S. Patent 3,301,678, bisisothi~roniums including 1,8-(3,6-dioxaoctane)-bis(isothiuronium trifluoroacetate), etc., as described in U.S. Patent 3,669,670, thiol compounds as described in German Patent Aplication (OLS) No. 2,162r714, thiazolium comnounds such as 2-amino-2-thiazolium trichloroacetate, 2-amino-5-bromoPthyl-2-thiazolium trichloroacetate, etc., as described in U.S.
Patent 4,012,260, compounds having ~-sulfonylacetate as an acid nart such as bis~2-amino-2-thiazolium)methylene-bis(sulfonylacetate~, 2-amino-2-thiazolium phenylsulfonyl-acetate, etc., as described in U.S. Patent 4,060,420, and compounds having 2-carboxycarboxamide as an acid part as described in U.S. Patent 4,088,496.
~13536 1 on the present invention, though it is not so necessary to urther incorporate substances or dyes for preventing irradiation or halation in the light-sensitive material, because the light-sensitive material is colored by the dye releasing redox compound, it is possible to add filter dyes or light absorbing materials, etc., as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 3692/73 and U.S. Patents 3,253,921, 2,527,583 and 2,956,879, etc., in order to further improve sharpness. It is preferred that these dyes have a thermal bleaching property. For example, dyes as described in U.S. Patents 3,769~019, 3,745,009 and 3,615,432 are pre erred.
The light-sensitive material used in the present invention may contain, if necessary, various additives known for the heat-develo~able light-sensitive materials and may have a layer other than the light-sensitive laver, for example, an antis-tatic layer, an electrically conductive layer, a protective layer, an intermediate layer, an antihalation layer, a strippable layer, etc.
3~
1 examples of various additives include those described in Research Disclosure, Vol. 170, No. 17029 (June, 1978), for example, plasticizers, dyes for improving sharpness, antihalation dyes, sensitizing dyes, matting agents, fluorescent whitening agents and fading preventing agent, etc.
The protective layer, the intermediate layer, the subbing layer, the back layer and other layers can be produced by preparing each coating solution and applying to a support by various coating methods such as a dip coating method, an air-knife coating method, a curtain coating method or a topper coating method as described in U.S. Patent 2,681,294 and drying in the same manner as used in preparing the heat-developable light-sensitive layer ox the present invention, by which the light-sensitive material is obtained.
If necessary, two or more layers may be applied at the same time by the method as described in U.S. Patent 2,761,791 and British Patent 837,095.
~2~53~
After the heat-developable color photographic material is exposed to light, the resulting latent image can be developed by heating the whole material to a suitably elevated temperature, for example, about 80C
to about 250C for about 0.5 second to about 300 seconds.
A higher temperature or lower temperature can be utilized to prolong or shorten the heating time, if it is within the above described tempera-ture range. Particularly, a temperature range of about 110C to about 160C is useful.
In the present invention, the light-sensitive material can be heated for development by an ordinary means such as a simple heating plate, a heating iron, a heat roller, a heating elernent utilizing carbon or titanium white, or a similar means.
In the image-forming process of the invention wherein a hydrophilic mobile dye is transferred onto a dye-fixing layer by heating the light-sensitlve material in the presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent, the transfer of the mobile dye may be initiated simultaneously with the release of the dye or after completing the release of the dye. Accordingly, heating for -the transfer of the mobile dye may be after heat development or simultaneously with heat development. The term "heating simultaneously with heat development" means that heating for development also acts as heating for transferring the dye released.
3~
The optimum heating temperature for development and the heating time necessary for the development do not always coincide with those for transferring the dye and hence, the heating temperatures may be selected independently.
Since the heating temperature for transferring the dye is 60C to 250C from the viewpoints of preservative property and workability of the light-sensitive material, etc., a material which exhibits the action as a hydro-philic thermal solvent in this temperature range may be properly used. It is, as a matter of course, necessary that the hydrophilic thermal solvent assists the quick transfer of dye, but considering also the heat resistance of the light-sensitive material, etc., the hydrophilic thermal solvent is required to have a melting point of 15 40C to 250C, preferably 40C to 200C, more preferably 40C to 150C.
The "hydrophilic thermal solvent" referred to in the invention is defined to be a compound which is in a solid state at room temperature but becomes in a liquid state upon heating, has an (inorganic property/organic property) value of larger than 1, and has a solubility in water at room temperature of higher than 1. In this case, the term "inorganic property/organic property" is a concep-tion for estimating the properties ofa compound and is described in detail in, for example, Kagaku no R~oiki 3~36 (The Domain of Chemistry), 11, page 719 (1957).
Since the hydrophilic thermal solvent has a role for assisting the transfer of the hydrophilic dye, it is preferred that the hydrophilic thermal solvent is a com-pound capable of acting as a solvent for the hydrophilic dye.
It is known by experiment that in a preferredsolvent for dissolving therein an organic compound, the tinorganic property/organic property) vaiue of the solvent is close to the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the organic compound. On the the other hand, the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the dye releasing redox compound used in the present invention is about 1, and the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the hydropilili.c dye released from the dye releasing redox cc)mpound is larger than the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the dye releasing redox compound and is preferably larger than l.S, more preferably larger than 2. Since it is preferred that the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention transfers only the hydrophilic dye and does not transfer the dye releasing redox compound, it is necessary that the (inorganic property/organic propexty) value of the hydrophilic thermal solvent is larger than the (inorganic property/organic property).value of the dye releasing redox compound. That is, it is necessary that the inorganic property/organic property) value of the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention be larger than 1, preferably larger than 2.
On the other hand, considering from the viewpoint of the size of molecule, it is preferred that molecules existing surrounding the transferring dye do not hinder the transfer of the dye and can also transfer by themselves.
Accordingly, it is preferred that the molecular weight of the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention be low, i.e., less than about 200, preferably less than about 10~. , It is enough that the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention can substantially assist the transfer of the hydrophilic dye formed from the dye 15 releasing redox compound by heat development onto a dye- -fixing layer. Therefore, the hydrophilic thermal solvent may be incorporated in not only a dye-fixing layer but also a photosensitive layer or in both the dye-fixing layer and the photosensitive layer. Furthermore, an independent layer containing a hydrophilic thermal solvent may be provided in the light-sensitive material and/or independent dye-fixing material having the dye-fixing layer. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the transfer efficiency of the dye onto the dye-fixing layer, it is preferred that the hydrophilic thermal solvent be incorporated in the ~LZ435~6 dye-fixing laver and/or a layer adjacent to the dye-fixing layer.
The hydrophilic thermal solvent is usually dissolved in water and dispersed in a binder, but it may be used by dissolving in an alcohol such as methanol, ethanol, etc.
The hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the inven-tion can be used in a coating amount of 5 to 500% by weight, preferably 20 to 200% by weight, more preferably 30 to 150~ by weight, based on the total coating amount of the coating compositions for the light-sensitive material and/or the dye-fixin~ material.
As the hydrophilic thermal solvent, there are, for example, ureas, pyridines, amides, sulfonamides, imides, alcohols, oximes, and other heterocyclic compounds.
Then, practical examples of the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention are illustrated below.
`
(3~ 0 (4) 0 H~NCNHC2H5 CH3NHCNE~CH3 ( 5 ) o ( 6 ) o (7? o ( 8 ) o (9) I
H2 NCN ( C 2 H40H ) 2 ,r 1~L
~l'h43S36 ( 10) H
H21C~
O = O
H C -(11) H H
HO--IC-C - O
HO_ C_N
H H
(12) o H2N-C-N ( CH3 ) 2 (13) O \
HC CH
i1 N
o - .
~LZ~3S3~i (14) H
HO CH
HC O
~N~ CH2H
( 15 ) C 2 Hi HC CH
'I No (16) H H
O O
No C- CH 2 OH
C--C
H H
HO
H
r--C
N CH
O _ C//
H H
~L243536 ( 18) OH
H
C--C
N CH
/~
C--C
H H
(19) H H
C = C
C//
H H
( 2 O ) HO OH
C--C
N CH
O _ I/
H H
(21) OH
C =C
O CH
C--C
H H
lZ'~3536 (22) C
Hess IH
2 \ CH 20H
(23) H~2H40H
( 24 ) HC-N~
N~H
(25) (26) O O
Il 11 ( HCNH ) 2CH2 CH3CN1~2 ~4~536 (27) (28) (CH3CNH)2CH2 C=O
(29) (30) O O
(31) O
H Al C NHCH
HC (32) o l ll CC 2C 2 No C OH
(33) OH O
(CH3) CH - C - NH2 (34) (35) (36) (37) -- gl --3~3~
(38j (39) HOCH SO
2 1 2 (CH3)2 NHCH
(40) (41) H C f H HC - CH
O=C C=O N
H H
(42) (43) H2 C--Hc2 /C--C\ l I
\C ci N
(44) (46) HC CH (CH3CO)2NH
N
i3~;
(46) C =2 H H
~47) HOCH2 ( CHOH ) 3CE~20H
(48) (49) CH 3 C ( CH 20H ) 3 C 2H 5C ( CH 20H ) 3 (50) (51) 02NC ( CH20H ) 3 Sorbitol ( 52 ) OH ( 53 ) CH2H
J~H / OH\ f H
H2 \ /~H2 2 OH 2 ~2 CH20H
(54) HOCH2 -CH=CH-CH20H
..
35~
(55) (56) CH3CH=NOH HON=CHCH=NOH
(57) (58) CH3C=NOH HOCH2CH=NOH
(59) (60) H H H H
C C C C
H H C
H H
(61) (62) Ho Z~3536 In the foregoing specific compounds illustrated above as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, the compounds (1), (2), (3), and (10) in ureas, the compounds (17) and (19) in pyridines, the compounds (26), (30), and (33) in amldes, the compounds (34) and (36) in sulfonamides, the compounds (40), (41), (43), ancd (44) in imides, and the compounds (46) and (54) in alcohols are particularly preferred. The foregoing compounds used as the hydrc)philic thermal solvent may be used solely or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
In the invention, it is necessary to transfer a mobile hydrophilic dye for~.ed imagewise hy the heat development performed simultaneously with or after image exposure and fix the mobile dye onto a dye-fixincJ layer.
Accordingly, the light-sensitive material of t:his invention is composed of a support having thereon at least a photo-sensitive layer (I) containing a silver halicle, an organic silver salt oxidizing agent which may be used if necessary, a dye releasing redox compound which is also a reducing agent for the organic silver salt oxidizing agent, and a binder and a dye-fixing layer (II) capable of receiving a mobile hydrophilic dye formed in the layer tI). Such a photosensitive layer (I) and a dye-fixing layer (II) may be formed on the same support or separate supports respectively. The dye-fixing layer (II) and the photo-X,~3536 sensitive layer (I3 may be peeled off from each other.For example, after imagewise exposure and then uniform heating, the dye-fixing layer (II~ or the photosensitive layer tI) may be peeled off from the other. Also, in case that a light-sensitive material having the photo-sensitive layer (I) on a support and a dye-fixing material having the dye-fixing layer (II) on another support are prepared separately, after imagewise exposing the light-sensitive material and uniformly heating, the dye-fixing material is superposed on the resulting light-sensitive material to thereby transfer the mobile dye onto the dye-fixing layer (II). Further, there may be-a manner that only the photosensitive layer (I) is imagewise exposed and the dye-fixing layer (II) is then superposed thereon, followed by uniformly heating.
The light-sensitive material can be closely - brought into contact with the dye-fixing material by usual manners such as those by press roller, etc., and in this case, for sufficiently performing the close contact of both the materials, the heating is employable during the contacting.
In case that after the heat development after or simultaneously with imagewise expasure, the surface of the light~sensitive material is closely wrought into contact with the dye-receiving surface of the dye-fixing ~3S3~
material and then heated, the latter heating can contribute to only the dye transfer and hence, the heating temperature and the heating time for the latter heating may be select-ed independent on the heating for the development.
In the case of employing such method, it is preferred to perform the heating for development such that the heating contributes to the dye transfer as less as possible, and that -the reaction for the development is finished in a short period of time. On the other hand, it is preferred for obtaining a sharp image that the heating for transferring the dye released imagewise is performed at a temperature of as low as possible such that the heat reaction of the unexposed area does not occur, in a proper range of a transferring period of time.
The dye-fixing layer (II) may have a white reflection layer. For example, a layer of titanium dioxide dispersed in gelatin may be formed on a mordant-ing layer provided on a transparent support. The titanium dioxide layer forms a white opaque layer and hence, when the transferred dye image is viewed from the side of the transparent support, a reflection-type color image can be viewed.
The dye transfer from the light-sensitive layer to the dye-fixing layer can be carried out using a dye transfer assistant. Examples of useful dye transfer assistant include water and an alkaline aqueous solution containing sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide or an inorganic alkali metal salt. Further, a solvent having a low boiling point such as methanol, N,N-dimethyl-formamide, acetone, diisobutyl ketone, etc., and a mixture of such a solvent having a low boiling point with water or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used. The dye transfer assistant can be employed by wetting the image receiving layer with the transfer assistant or by incorporating it in the form of water of crystalliæation or microcapsules into the material.
The dye-fixing layer may contain a dye mordant for fixing the dye, a hydrophilic thermal solvent for assisting the transfer of the dye, a base and/or a base precursor for acceleratina the dye releasing reaction, etc., and further a binder for these materials. When the dye-fixing layer is formed on a support other than the support of the light-sensitive material, the foregoing embodiment that the dye-fixing layer contains the base and/or the base precursor is particularly preferred.
Since in the present invention, the dye in the light-sensitive material may transferred into the in-dividually provided dye-fixing material, in order to obtain a high-auality ultimate image fixed in the dye-;
~LZ~3536 fixing material, a specific means is required. That is, in order to increase the quality of the dye image trans-ferred onto the dye-fixing layer, it is useful to in-corporate a base and/or a base precursor into any one of the layers constituting the dye-fixing material.
Especially, it is preferred to incorporate a bcse ancl/or a base precursor into the dye-fix-n~ layer or a layer provided on the dye-fixing layer because the image density is sufficiently high as well as a sharp dye image can be obtained. As such a base and/or base precursor, the above-described bases and/or base precursors as the dye releasing activators useful in the light-sensitive material can, for example, be exemplified.
In the present invention, the ultimate image is formed in the dye-fixing material which is not light-sensitive. In this case, since the function for imparting "light sensitivity" and that for fixing the ultimate image be imparted to the light-sensitive material and the dye-fixing material independently, materials which sufficiently exhibit the respective fucntions can be widely selected.
As the base and/or base precursor used in the dye-fixing material of the invention, usual inorganic or organic bases and/or base precursors are useful. The "base precursors" referred to in the invention mean ones Z~j3G
releasing a basic component upon thermal decomposition.
Examples of the inorganic base include hydroxides of alkali metals or alkaline earth metals, diphosphates, triphosphates, borates, carbonates, quinolinates, pyro-S phosphates, metaphosphates, ammonium hydroxide, quaternaryalkylammonium hydroxides, and other hydroxides. Specific examples of these inorganic bases include lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium quinolinate, potassium quinolinate, sodium diphosphate, potassium diphosphate, sodium triphosphate, potassium triphosphate, sodium pyrophosphate, potassium pyrophosphate, sodium metaphosphate, potassium metaphosphate, borax, ammonium hydroxide, tetramethylammonium, tetrabutylammonium, ammonia and the like.
Examples of the organic base used for the dye releasing activator of the present invention include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, amidines, cyclic amidines, quanidines, and cyclic quanidines, with those having a pea of higher than 8 being par-ticularly useful. In the invention, precursors of these organic bases can be used as preferred base precursors. Examples of such base precursors include salts of thermally decom-posable organic acids such as trichloroacetic acid, cyanoacetic acid, acetoacetic acid, etc., and salts of 2-carboxy carboxide as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,088,496.
Further, base precursors as disclosed in British Patent 998,945, U.S. Patent 3,220,846 and Japanese Patent Appli-cation ~OPI) No. 22625/75 can also be used. Still further, bases which are used as alkaline agents and buffers in the conventional photographic materials and their treating solutions may also be used.
Preferred examples of the organic base which can be used in the present invention include guanidine trichloroacetate, piperidine trichloroacetate, morpholine trlchloroacetate, p-toluidine trichloroacetate, and 2-picoline trichloroacetate. Eurther, the compounds as listed below can also be used.
MeNH2~ Me2NH, EtNH2 Et2NH, C4H9NH2 (C4~9)2NH, HOC2H4NH2 (HOC2H4)2NH~ H2NC2H4NH2 MeNH 2l c2~ c C2H4NH2 ~.2~3536 H2l Me21N
C5H40N 2 C2 4NMe2 Me2 l cH2 C3H6NMe2 H2C/ \
2 \N~ 2 H H2 j~H~
H C C
r~,2~536 H
~N~
H2C ON ~H2 I
1 2H4H (ON/
H2C/ \CH2 H2~ ~1H2 NH
I' H(~N
..!.
~43~36 Me2 ON ~C/I H
H2e lH2 Ho CH3 C--N
No /~H H2 C~3 I' 2 Ho l N HO OH
C--C
H H
Z~3536 HC -- S
HCI C = O CIH3 CH 3 \\~ --C
H H
G=C
NH
HN = O CH3 C
N=C
\ C /
NH
..
-H2~ H2 H
~lC/
C
H2N~ to N~C--NH NH2 MeNH
O = NH
MeNH
MeNH
~--NMe MeNH
353~
Me2N
O NH
Me2~
cH2 H2C~ ~N~ ~H2 H C--C
H2iC 1 - N
H 2 C / \ / 2 CH2 `C ' /~ I
3Si36 O
H3C f ` NCH3 CH
H CH
N f ... .
~12~3S36 -The base precursor used in the invention can be-used in a wide range in terms of its amount. But it is suitably used in an amount of less than 50% by weight, preferably Q.01 to 40% by weight, as calculated on the basis of the weight of the coated surface of the dye-fixing layer. In the present invention, the base and/or base precursor may be used either alone or in admixture of two or more thereof.
The base and/or base precursor is usually dis-solved in water or an alcohol and then dispersed in thedye-fixing layer. The dispersion may be performed in accordance with a method as disclosed in U.S. Patent 2,322,027 in which an organic solvent having a high boiling point is used. Further, there may be employed a method in which the base and/or base precursor is dissolved in an organic solvent having a boiling point of about 30 to 160C, such as lower alkyl acetates (e.g., ethyl acetat2 or butyl acetate), ethyl propionate, sec-butyl alcohol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ~-ethoxyethyl acetate, methyl cellosolve acetate, cyclohexane, etc., and then dispersed in the dye-fixing layer.
Examples of the organic solvent having a high boiling point include, for example, a phthalic acid alkyl ester (for example, dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl ?5 phthalate, etc.), a phosphoric acid ester (for example, diphenyl phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phos-phate, dioctylbutyl phosphate, e-tc.),` a citric acid ester 3L2'~3536 (for example, tributyl acetylcitrate, etch), a benzoic acid ester (for example, octyl benzoate, etc.), an alkyl amide (for example, diethyl laurylamide, etc.), an aliphatic acid ester (for example, dibutoxyethyl succinate, dioctyl azelate, etc.), a trimesic acid ester (for example, tributyl trimesate, etc.), etc. The above described orcanic solvents having a high boiling point and organic solvents havina a low boiling point may be used as a mixture thereof. Further, it is possible to use a dis-persion method using a polymer as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 29853/76 and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 59943/76.
., ,, ., = = . ., ., ., . ........... _ ..
The dye-fixing material of the invention may be constructed by plural layers of the dye-fixing layer and a layer or layers other than the dye-fixing layer, e.g., a protective layer, an interlayer, etc.
The dye-fixing layer of the invention is constructed by a single layer or plural layers and con-tains a dye mordant for fixiny the dye. The base and/or base precursor is used by dispersing in a layer or layers containing the dye mordant. Alternatively, the base and/or base precursor may be used by dispersing in a binder in a layer adjacent to the layer containing the dye mordant.
As the dye mordant, various mordants can be used. Among them are particularly preferred polymer mordants. The polymer mordant and the base and~or base precursor can be dispersed in the binder described below. The binder ~2~353~;
which can be used in the present invention can be employed individually or in a combination thereof. A hydrophilic binder can be preferably used as the binder according to the present invention. The typical hydrophilic binder is S a transparent or translucent hydrophilic colloid, examples of which include a natural substance, for example, protein such as gelatin, a gelatin derivative, a cellulose derivative, etc., a polysaccharide such as starch, gum arabic, etc., and a synthetic polymer, for example, a water-soluble polyvinyl compound such as polyvinyl pyrro-lidone, acrylamide polymer, etc. Another example of the synthetic polymer compound is a dispersed vinyl compound in a latex form which is used for the purpose of increas-ing dimensional stability of a pho-tographic ma-terial.
When the dye mordant is a polymer mordant, the mordant also acts as a binder and hence, the amount of the binder may be reduced or the binder may not parti-cularly be used. Contrarily, when the binder has a function as a mordant, the dye mordant may not be used.
Any materials which are usually used as a binder for photographic light-sensitive materials can be used as the binder in the inventionO
The mordant used for the dye-fixing layer of the invention can be properly selected from conventional mord-ants and among them, polymer mordants are particularlypreferred.
~'Z4~53~
1 Polymer mordants used in the present invention are polymers containing secondary and tertiary amino groups, polymers containing nitrogen-containing hetero cyclic moieties, polymers having quaternary cation groups thereof, having a molecular weight of from 5,000 to 200,000, and particularly from 10,000 to 50,000.
For example, there are illustrated vinyl-pyridine polymers and vinylpyri~inium cation polymers - as disclosed in U.S. Patents2,548,564, 2,484,430, 3,148,061 and 3,756,814, etc., polymer mordants capable of cross-linking with gelatin as disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,625,694, 3,859,096 and 4,128,538, British Patent 1,277,453, etc., aqueous sol type mordants as disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,958,99S, 2,721,852 and 2,798,063, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 115228/79, 145529/79 and 126027/79, etc., water-insoluble mordants as disclosed in U.S. Patent 3,898,088, etc., reactive mordants capable of forming covalent bonds with dyes used as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,168,976 (Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 137333/79), etc., and mordants disclosed in U.S. Patents-3,709,690, 3,788,855, 3,642,482, 3,488,706, 3,557,066, 3,271,147 and 3,271,148, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 71332/75, 30328/78, 155528/77, 125J78 and 1024/78, etc.
~2~536 1 In addition, mordants disclosed in U.S. Patents 2,675,316 and 2,882,156 can be used.
Of these mordants, for example, mordants capable of cross-linking with a matrix such as gelatin, water-insoluble mordants, and aqueous sol (or latex dispersion) t~7pe mordants are preferably used.
Particularly preferably polymer mordants are described below.
(1) Polymers having quaternary ammonium groups and groups capable of forming covalent bonds with gelatin (for example, aldehydo groups, chloroalkanoyl grou?s, chloroalkyl groups, vinylsulronyl groups, pyridinium-propionyl groups, vinylcarbonyl groups, alkylsulfonoxy croups, etc.), such as CH2--CH ) ~CH2--IC~
O , O
C=O , C=O
ce H3C--N--CH3 CH
`
~24353G
l (2) Reaction products between a copolymer comprising a repeating unit of a monomer represented by the general formula described below with a repeating unit of another ethylenically unsaturated monomer and a cross-linking agent for example, bisalkanesulonate, bisarenesulfonate, etch:
Rb ~CH--C - ) `
~b Q
Rb _ N--Rb wherein represents H or an alkyl group, R2 represents H, an alkyl group or an aryl group, Q represents a divalent group, Rb3, Rb4 and Rb5 each represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or at least two of Rb to Rb5 are bonded together to form a hetero ring, and X represents an anion. The above described alkyl groups and aryl groups may be substituted.
l (3) Polymers represented by the following general formula ox- ( B CH 2--CH~
, W ~,b . Rb wherein x is prom about 0.25 mol% to about 5 mol%, y is from about O mol% to about 90 mol%, z is from about lO mol% to about 99 mol%, A represents a monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated bonds, B represents a copolymeri~able ethylenically unsaturated monomer, Q
represents N or P, Rbl, Rb2 and Rb3 each represents an alkyl group or a cyclic hydrocarbon group or at least two of Rl to R~ are bonded together to form a ring (these groups and rings may be substituted), and M represents an anion.
.
1 (4) Copolymers composed of (a), (b) and (c), wherein (a) is X X
or CH=CH2 CH=CH 2 wherein X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogen atom (the alkyl group may be substituted);
~b~ is an acrylic ester; and (c) is acrylonitrile.
(5) Water-insoluble polymers wherein at least 1/3 of the repeating units are those represented by the following general formula ~CH2--CH 3 by ~,b CH 2 -RbZ
I b X~3 ~3 ~,z~53G
wherein Rlb; R2b and R3b each represents an alkyl group, with the total number of carborl atoms included being 12 or more the alkyl group may be substituted), and X represents an anion.
Various kinds of known gelatins can be employed as gelatin for the mordant layer For example, gelatin which is produced in a different manner such as lime-processed gelatin, acid-processed gelatin, etc., or a gelatin derivative which is prepared by chemically modify-ing gelatin such as phthalated gelatin, sulfonvlated gelatin, etc., can be used. Also, gelatin subjected to a desalting treatment can be used, if desired.
The ratio of polymer mordant to gelatin and the amount of the polymer mordant coated can be easily determined lS by one skilled in the art depending on the amount of the dye to be mordanted, the type and composition of the polymer mordant and further on the image-forming process used.
Preferably, the ratio of mordant to gelatin is from 20/80 to 80/20 (by weight) and the amount of the mordant coated is from 0.5 to 8 g/m2.
A typical dye-fixing material used in the inven-tion can be obtained by coating a mixture of a polymer containing an am~onium salt and gelatin on a transparent support.
When the dye-fixing layer is disposed on the 353~
surface of the dye-fixing material, a protective layer may be formed thereon, if desired. us such a protective layer, materials usually used for protective layers for photographic light-sensitive materials can be used, but when the dye-fixing layer is formed on a support different from the sup-port of the light-sensitive material, it is preferred that the protective layer is rendered hydrophilic in order to prevent hindering the transfer of the hydrophilic dye.
As the support of the dye-fixing material of the invention, the above described support used in the light-sensitive material can be optionally chosen. However, organic polymers which are resistant to the heating for the development or the dye transfer are preferred.
Examples of the organic polymers used in the dye-fixing material of the invention include polys~vrene having a molecular weight of 2,000 to 85,000, polystyrene derivatives having a substituent of up to 4 carbon atoms, polyvinylcyclohexane, polyvinylbenzene, polyvinylpyrroli-done, polyvinylcarbazole, polyallylbenzene, polyvinyl alcohol, polyacetals (e.g~, polyvinylformal or polyvinyl-butyral), polyvinyl chloride, chlorinated polyethylene, polyethylene trichlorofluoride, polyacrylonitrile, poly-N,N-dimethylallylamide, a polyacrylate having a p-cyanophenyl group, a pentachlorophenyl group, or a 2,4-dichlorophenyl group, polyacryl chloroacrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, 3~i3~
polyethyl methacrylate, polypropyl methacrylate, poly-isopropyl methacrylate, polyisobutyl methacrylate, poly-t-butyl methacrylate, polycyclohexyl methacrylate, poly-ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, poly~2-cyano-ethyl methacrylate, polyesters (e.g., polyethylene terephtha]ate), polysulfone, bisphenol A polycarbonate, polycarbonates, polyanhydrides, polyamides, and cellulose acetates. Also, synthetic polymers as described in Polymer Handbook, 2nd Edition (edited by J. Brandrup and E. H. Im~nergut), published by John Wiley & Sons Co. are useful as the organic polymers in this invention. These polymers may be used solely or as a combination of them.
Examples of the support advantageously used in this invention are films of cellulose acetates such as triacetate, diacetate, etc.; films of polyamides such as combinations of heptamethylenediamine and terephthalic acid, fluorenedipropylamine and adipic acid, hexamethylene-diamine and diphenic acid, hexamethylenediamine and isophthalic acid, etc.; films of polyesters such as the combinations of diethylene qlycol and diphenylcarboxylic acid, bis-p-carboxyphenoxybutane and ethylene ~lycol, etc.; polyethylene terephthalate films, polycarbonate films, etc. These films may be denatured. For example, a polyethylene terephthalate film denatured by using 25 cyclohexane dimethanol, isophthalic acid, methoxypoly- -ethylene glycol, 1,2-dicarbomethoxy-4-benzenesulfonic acid, etc., as a denaturant is advantageously used.
r 119 -353~
In the photographic light-sensi~ive material and the dye-fixing material of the present invention, the photographic emulsion layer and other binder layers may contain inorganic or organic hardeners. It is possible to use chromium salts (chromium alum, chromium acetate, etc.), aldehydes (formaldehyde, glyoxal, glutaraldehyde, etc.), N-methylol compounds (dimethylolurea, methylol dimethylhydantoin, etc.), dioxane derivatives (2,3-dihydroxydioxane, etc.), active vinyl compounds (1,3,5-triacryloylhexahydro-s-triazine, 1,3-vinylsulfonyl-2-propanol, etc.), active halogen compounds (2,4-dichloro-6-hydroxy-s-triazine, etc.), mucohalogenic acids (muco-chloric acid, mucophenoxychloric acid, etc.), etc., which are used individually or as a combination thereof.
As the heating means for iransferring the dye, various heating means as described above in regard to the heating means for the heat development can be used.
In the present invention, the light-sensitive material having the photosensitive layer and the dye-fixing layer on the same support or the dye-fixing material having the dye-fixing layer on a different support from what of the light-sensitive material can be prepared by coating respective coating compositions for the dye-fixing layer, protective layer, interlayer, subbing layer, backing layer, etc., in the same manners as described in - 12~ -353~
l the case of forming the photosensitive layer or other layer using a dipping method, an air knife method, a curtain coating method, or a hopper coating method as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,681,294, followed by drying.
Various means of exposure can be used in the present invention. Latent images are obtained by image-wise exposure by radiant rays including visible rays.
Generally, light sources used for conventional color prints can be used, examples of which include tungsten lamps, mercury lamps, halogen lamps such as iodine lamps, xenon lamps, laser ligh' sources, CRT light sources, fluorescent tubes and light-emitting diodes, etc.
The orisinal may be line drawings or photographs having gradation. Further, it is possible to take a photograph of a portrait or landscape by means of a camera. Printins from the original may be carried out by contact printing by superposing the original on the material or may be carried out by reflection printing or enlargement printing.
It is also possible to carry out the printing of imayes photographed by a videocamera or image informa-tions sent from a television broadcasting station by displaying on a cathode ray tube (CRT) or a fiber optical tube (FOT) and focusing the resulting image on the heat-developable photographic material by contacting therewith or by means of a lens.
Z~3s~6 l Recently, light-emitting diode (LED) systems which have been greatly improved have begun to be utilized as an exposure means or display means for various apparatus and devices. It is difficult to produce an LED which efectively emits blue light. In this case, in orcler to reproduce the color image, three kinds of LEDs consisting of those emitting each green light, red light and infrared light are used. The light-sensitive material to be sensitized by these lights is produced so as to release a yellow dve, a magenta dye and a cvan dye, respectively.
The light-sensitive material is produced using a construction such that the green~sensitive part (layer) contains a yellow dye releasing redox compound, the red-sensitive part (layer) contains a magenta dye releasinq redox compound and the in~rared-sensitive part slayer) contains a cyan dye releasing redox compound. Other combinations can be utilized, if necessary.
In addition to the above described methods af contacting or projecting ye original, there is a method of exposure wherein the original illuminated by a light source is stored in a memory of a reading computer by means of a light-receiving element such as a phototube 3536 I;
1 or a charge coupling device (CCD). The information is, if necessary, subjected to processing, the so-called image treatment, and resulting image information is reproduced on CRT which can be utilized as an image-like light source or lights are emitted by three winds of LED according to the prcoessed information.
The image-forming process of the invention is a very convenient image-forming process wherein the whole of steps from light exposure to heat development and dye-fixing can be performed in a completely dry system without particulalry supplying a solvent from the outside.
Furthermore, since in the image-forming process of the invention, not only sensitivity of a conventional so-called silver halide photographic material can be main-tained but aLso dye image formed is fixed in the dye-fixing material, the quality and the preservative property of the dye image thus formed are very good, the color repro-ducibility is good, and in spite of the completely dry system, the reproduction of color images can be sufficiently performed.
The image-forming process of the invention having such excellent features can be applied for the field of photography as well as can meet the recent requirement for the transfer of so-called soft images to hard images.
Moreover, in the image-forming process of the invention, 3~36 the dye image formed is fixed in the dye-fixing layer, whereby the dye image has a good preservative property and hence, the process of the invention can be conveniently utilized even in the case of requiring the preservation of dote images for a long period of time. Thus, the image-forming process of the invention exceeds conventional photographic techniques in the foregoing points.
Then, the invention will further be explained below in detail by the following examples but the invention is not limited to them.
Example l -Preparation o light-sensitive material D-l:
A silver iodobromide emulsion was prepared by the following manner.
lS on 3,000 mQ of water were dissolved 40 g of gelatin and 26 g of potassium bromide and the solution was stirred at 50C. Then, a solution ox 34 g of silver nitrate dis-solved in 200 mQ of water was added to the foregoing solu-tion for lO minutes and thereafter, a solution of 3.3 g of potassium iodide dissolved in lO0 mQ of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period to provide a silver iodobromide emulsion. Thy pH of the silver iodobromide emulsion thus obtained was adjusted to cause sedimentation, and after removing excessive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 353~
400 g of the silver iodobromide emulsion.
Then, a benzotriazole silver emulsion was pre-pared by the following manner.
In 3,000 mQ of water were dissolved 28 g of gelatin and 13.2 g of benzotriazole and the resultant solution was stirred at 40C. To the solution was added a solution of 17 g of silver nitrate dissolved in lO0 mQ
of water over a two minute period. The pH of the benzo-triazole silver emulsion thus formed was adjusted to cause sedimentation, and after removing excessive salts, the pH
of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 400 g of the ~enzotriazole silver emulsion.
Then, a gelatin dispersion of a dye releasing redox compound was prepared by the following manner.
In 20 my o' ethyl acetate were dissolved 5 g of the magenta dye releasing redox compound (42), 0.5 g of a surface active agent, succinic acid 2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate, and 5 g of tricresyl phosphate (TCP) under heating to about 60C to form a homogeneous solution.
The solution was mixed with lO0 g of an aqueous solution o lo limed gelatin with stirring and mixture was treat-ed by means of a homogenizer for lO minutes at lO,000 r.p.m.
to provide a dispersion of the magenta dye releasing redox compound.
A photosensitive layer was formed as follows.
~53~
(a) Silver iodobromide emulsion 20 g (b) Benzotriazole silver emulsion 10 g (c) Gelatin dispersion of dye releasing redox compound (42) 33 g (d) Aqueous solution of 2.5% com-pound (A) having the followiny structure lO mQ
9 l9 \ H
HC CH
C -C (CH2CEI2O)8H
o (e) Ethanol solution of lo guanidine trichloroacetate 12.5 mQ
(f) Aqueous solution of 10 dimethyl sulfamide 4 m.
Foregoing components (a) to ( f) were mixed under heating to provide a photosensitive coating com-position and the coating composition thus prepared was coated on a polyethylene terephthalate fil.m of 180 em in thickness at a wet thickness of 30 em.
Furthermore, a protective layer was formed on the photosensltive layer thus formed by the following manner.
(g) Aqueous solution of 10% gelatin 35 g (h) Ethanol solution ox 10%
guanidine trichloroacetate 5 mQ
(i) Aqueous solution of lo succinic acid-2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate 4 mQ
3~
(j) Water 56 mQ
A mixture of the foregoing components was coated on the photosensitive layer at a wet thickness of 25 em and then dried to provide light-sensitive material D-l.
Example 2 Preparation of light-sensitive material D-2:
By following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that dye releasing redox compound (68) was used in place of dye releasing redox compound (42) used in Example 1 and 5 g of the silver iodobromide emulsion was used in place of 10 g of the benzotriazole silver emulsion used for the photosensitive coating composition, light-sensitive material D-2 was prepared.
. Example 3 Preparation of light-sensitive material D-3:
In 1,000 mQ of water were dissolved 6.5 g of benzotriazole and 10 g of gelatin, and the solution was stirred at 50C. Then, a solution of 8.5 g of silver nitrate dissolved in 100 mQ of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period and further, a solution of 1.2 g of potassium bromide dissolved in 50 mQ
of water was also added to the solution over a two minute period. The pH of the emulsion thus prepared was adjusted to cause sedimentation, and after removing excessive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 200 g of the emulsion.
Then, by following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that 25 g of the foregoing benzotriazole silver emulsion containing photosensitive silver bromide was used in place of the silver iodobromide emulsion and the benzotriazole silver emulsion used for the photo-sensitive coating composition in Example 1 and further dye releasing redox compound (21) was used in place of dye releasing redox compound (42), light-sensitive material D-3 was prepared.
Example 4 Pre aration of li ht-sensitive materials D-4 to 6:
.P
By following the same procedures as in Examples 1 to 3 except that guanidine trichloroacetate used in Examples 1 to 3 were not used, light-sensitive materials D-4 to 6 were prepared.
Example 5 Preparation of light-sensitive material D-7:
By following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that the amount (220 mg) of guanidine trichloro-acetate used in Example 1 was reduced to 1/2 of the amount, i.e., to 110 mg, light-sensitive material D-7 was prepared.
Example 6 Pre aration of d e-fixin material R-l:
P Y
In 200 mQ of water was dissolved 10 g of poly-'ILz4353~
(methyl acrylate-co-N,N,N-trimethyl-N-vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride) (the ratio of methyl acrylate to vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride being 1 : 1) and the solution was uni-formly mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solution of 10%
S limed gelatin. The mixture was uniformly coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film at a wet thickness of 90 em.
After mixing components (k) to (oj shown below, the mixture was uniformly coated on the layer thus formed nt a wet thickness of 60 em and dried. Hereinafter, the 2nd layer was called as a hydrophilic thermal solvent layer.
(k) Urea (hydrophilic thermal solvent) 4 g tQ) Water 10 mQ
(m) Aqueous solution of 10 wt%
polyvinyl alcohol (saponifi-cation degree: 98%) 12 g (n) Compound A used in Example 1 100 mg (o) Aqueous solution of 5% sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate 0.5 mQ
Examples 7 to 9 Prepara-tion of dye-fixing materials R-2, R-3 and R-4:
By following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that 4 g of pyridine N-oxide was used in place of 4 g of urea used in Example 6 as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, dye-fixing material R-2 was prepared.
;~4353~
Also, by following the same procedure as above using 4 g of sulfonamide and 4 g of acetamide, respectively, as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, dye-fixing materials R-3 and R-4 were prepared, respectively.
Examples 10 and ll Preparation of dye-fixing materials R-5 and R-6:
By following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that a mixture of 2 g of urea and 2 g of N-methyl urea was used in place of 4 g of urea used in Example 6 as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, dye-fixing material R-5 was prepared.
Also, by following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that a mixture of 1 cJ of urea l g of N-methylurea, l g of ethylurea, and 1 g of ethylene urea was used in place of 4 g of urea used in Example 6, dye-fixing maierial R-6 was prepared.
Examples 12 to 14 Preparation of dye-fixing materials R-7 to R-9:
By following the same procedure as in Example 6 except 6 except that 0.8 g of guanidine trichloroacetate was added to the coating composition for the 2nd layer (hydrophilic thermal solvent layer) in Example 6, dye-fixing material R-7 was prepared.
Also, by following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that each of 0.4 g of guanidine trichloro-3S3~
acetate and 0.4 g of sodium carbonate was added to the coating composition for the 2nd layer in Example 6, dye-fixing materials R~8 and R-9 were prepared, respectively.
Example 15 Light-sensitive material D-l was imagewise exposed for lO seconds usiny a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux and thereafter was uniformly heated for 20 seconds on a heat block heated to 140C.
Then, each of dye-fixing materials R-l to R-9 was closely brought into contact with the light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a ~ace-to-face relationshlp with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block at 120C.
When each dye-fixing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on each dye-fixing material. The density of -the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-504) and the results are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Minimum Dye-fixing Hydrophilic thermal Maximum density material solvent dens.it~ (unexposed area R-l urea 1.20 0.13 R-2 pyridine oxide 1.15 0.12 R-3 sulfonamide 0.99 0.14 R-4 acetamide 0.98 0.10 R-5 urea/N-methylurea 1.23 0.14 R-6 urea/N-methylurea/
ethylurea/ethylene urea 1.25 0.15 R-7 urea 1.28 0.22 R-8 urea 1.26 0.18 R-9 urea 1.21 0.19 From the foregoing results, it has been confirmed that images of the high maximum density are obtained without supplying water by using the dye-fixing materials contain-ing the hydrophilic thermal solvents, respectively, and also particularly sharp images are obtained in the case of using the dye-fixing materials (R-5 and R-6) contain-ing two or more kinds of the hydrophilic thermal solvents.
Example 16 Each of light-sensitive materials D-l to D-3 in Examples 1 to 3 was exposed and heat developed as in Example 15. Each of the light-sensitive materials was closely brought into contact with dye-fixing material 353~
R-l shown in Example 6 with the coated layers in a face-to-face relationship and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block at 120C. When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from each of the light-sensitive sheets, each of negative magenta, yellow, and cyan images was obtained on the dye-fixing material. The densities of each negative image thus obtained were measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-504) and the results are shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Ligh-t-sensitive Dye releasing Maximum Minimum Material re(lox compound Hue dens-ty density D-l Compound (42) magenta 1.20 0.13 D-2 " (68) yellow 1.25 0.12 D-3 . " (21) cyan 1.10 0.18 Yrom the above results, it has been confirmed that the image of high cyan, magenta, or yellow maximum density was obtained without supplying water by using the dye-fixing material containing the hydrophilic thermal sovlent.
Example 17 Each of light-sensitive materials D-4 to D-6 in Example 6 was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux. Each of the light-sensitive materials was closely brought into contact with dy~-fixing ~L~L~3536 material R-8 in Example 13 with the coated layers in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block of 130C.
. When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from each light-sensitive sheet, negative magenta, yellow, and cyan images were formed on the dye-fixing material respective-ly. The densities of each negative ima~Je thus formed were measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-504) and the results are shown in Table 3.
Table 3 tight-sensitive Dye releasing . Maximum Minimum material redox compound Sue ensity dens D-4 Compound (42) magenta 1.16 0.15 D-5 " (68) yellow 1.20 0.16 D-6 (21) cyan 1.03 0.20 From the above results, it has been confirmed that images of high maximum density are obtained in tne case of performing heat development ancl dye transfer simultaneously by using the dye-fixiny material containing the hydrophilic thermal solvent.
Example 18 The light exposure, heat development and transfer were performed in the same manner as in Example 17 except that dye-fixing material R-9 was used in place of dye-fixing material R-8 used in Example 17 and as the result, - 13~. - -- ~z43S3~
each of negative magenta, yellow and cyan images was obtained on the dye-fixing material as in the case of using R-8.
Example 19 By following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that 1.5 g of hydrophilic thermal solvent (1), urea was added to the photosensitive coating composition for the light-sensitive material D-l in Example 1, light-sensitive material D-8 was prepared.
Furthermore, by following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that in dye-fixing material R-l in Example 6, the coating amount of urea in the hydro-philic thermal solvent layer was reduced to 1/2 of the amount thereof in Example 6, dye-fixing material R-10 was prepared.
Light-sensitive material D-8 was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux and thereafter was uniformly heated for 20 seconds to 130C. Then, the light-sensitive material was closely brought into contact with dye-fixing material R-10 with the coated layer in a face-to-facè relationship with each other and the assembly was heated for 20 seconds to 120C.
When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image having a high density was ohtained on the dye-fixing material. When the . .
1~3S3~
density of the negative color image was measured using aMacbeth densitometer (RD-504), the maximum density was 1.22 and the minimum density was 0.19. Thus, it has been confirmed that a dye image having a high density can be obtained by heating in a short period of time without supplying water by incorporating the hydrophilic thermal solvent in the light-sensitive material.
Example 20 Dye-fixing material R-ll used in the invention was prepared as follows.
In 200 mQ of wa-ter were dissolved 10 g of poly-(methyl acrylate-co-N,N,N-trimethyl-N-vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride) (ratio of methyl acrylate to vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride being 1:1) and 25 g of hydrophilic thermal solvent (1) and the solution was uniformly mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solu-tion of 10% limed gela-tin. The mixture was uniformly coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film at a wet thickness of 90 em.
On the layer thus formed was coated polyvinyl alcohol at a dry thickness of 1.5 em to provide dye-fixing material R-ll.
Light-sensitive material D-l was imagewise exposed for 10 minutes using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux and thereafter was uniformly heated for 20 seconds on a heat block heated to 140C.
3~;
Then, the light-sensitive material was closely brought into contact with dye-fixing material R-ll with the coated layers in a face-to-face relationship with each other and the assembly was heated for 30 seconds on S a heat block at 120C~
When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on the dye-fixing material. When the densities of the negative image thus obtained were measured using a Macbeth densitolneter (RD-504), the maximum density was 1.26 and the minimum density was 0.18.
Thus, it has been con irmed that a color image - having the high maximum density is obtained without supplying water by using the dye-fixing material contain-ing the hydrophilic thermal solvent in the dye-fixing layer.
Exam?le 21 In 3,000 mQ of water were dissolved 40 g of gelatin and 26 g of po-tassium bromide and the solution was stirred at 50C. Then, a solution of 34 g of silver nitrate dissolved in 200 my of water was added to the foregoing solution and thereafter, a solution of 3.3 g of potassium iodide dissolved in 100 my of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period to provide a silver iodobromide emulsion. The pH of the 353~
silver iodobromide emulsion thus obtained was adjusted to cause sedimentation and after removing excessive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 400 g of the silver iodobromide emulsionO
Then, a gelatin dispersion of a dye releasing redox compound was prepared by the following manner.
In 30 mQ of ethyl acetate were dissolved 5 g of the magenta dye releasing redox compound (42), 0.5 g of a surface active agent, succinic acid 2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate, and 5 g of tricresyl phosphate (TCP) under heating to about 60C to form a homogeneous solution.
The solution was mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solution-of 10% limed gelatin with stirring and the mixture was treated by means of a homogenizer for 10 minutes at 15 10,000 r.p.m. to provide a dispersion of the magenta dye releasing redox compound.
Then,a photosensitive coating composition was prepared by the following manner.
(a) Photosensitive silver iodobromide emulsion 25 g 20 (b) Dispersion of dye releasing redox compound 33 g (c) Aqueous solution of 5% compound having the following structure 5 mQ
C gHl9 C C
O O
H \ O / (CH2CH2O)loH
(d) Aqueous solution of 10% compound having the following structure 4 mQ
H2N - SO2 - N(CH3)2 (e) Water 20 mQ
Foregoing components (a) to (e) were mixed under heating to provide a photosensitive coating composi-tion and the coating composition thus prepared was coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film o 180 em in thick-ness at a wet thickness of 30 em.
Furthermore, a protective layer was formed on the photosensi.tive layer thus formed by the following manner.
(a) Aqueous solution of 10% gelatin 35 g (b) Aqueous solution of 1% succinic acid-2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate 4 mQ
(c) Water 61 mQ
A mixture of the foregoing components was coated on the photosensitive layer at a wet thickness of 25 I. .
Then, a dye-fixing material containing a dye-~2~3536 fixing agent was by the following manner.
In 200 mQ of water was dissolved 10 g of poly-(methyl acrylate-co-N,N,N-trimethyl-N-vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride) (the ratio of methyl acrylate -to vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride being 1:1) and the solution was uniformly mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solution of 10% limed gelatin, The mixture was uniformly coated on a 120 ~m-thick polyethylene terephthalate film having dispersed therein titanium dioxide at a wet thickness of 90 em.
After mixing and dissolving components (a) to (e) shown below, the solution (hereinafter "solution A"?
was uniformly coated on the layer thus formed at a wet thickness of 60 em.
(a) Urea (hydrophilic heat solvent) 4 g (b) Water 10 mQ
(c) Aqueous solution of 10 wt.%
polyvinyl alcohol (saponifica-tion degree: 9~%) 12 g (d) Compound having the following structure 100 mg 9 19 \ H
/C--C
HC CH
O O
H \ / (CH2cH2)8H
o - I\
(e) Aqueous solution ox 5~ sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate 0.5 mQ
This coating sample was dried and used as a dye-ixing material (hereinafter .''sheet A"). The same procedure as above was repeated except that 0.4 g of sodium carbonate was used as a base in the solution A
to prepare a coating solution (hereinafter "solution B").
Using this solution B, a dye-ixing material was obtained in the same manner as above (this dye-fixing material being hereinafter referred to "sheet B").
The li~ht-sensitive material as obtained above was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux.
Then, each of the dye-fixin~ materials as prepared above was closely brought into contact with the light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heA-ted for 30 seconds on a heat block at 130C.
When each dye-fi~ing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on only sheet B. The density of the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-519) and the results are shown below.
~2~S3~
Dye-fix.ing Maximum Minimum Material density density A (Comparison) 0.13 0.13 B (Invention) 1.70 0.22 From the foregoing results, it has been con-firmed that images of the high maximum density are obtained by using the dye-fixing material of this invention.
Example 22 A sample was prepared in the same manner as in Example 21 except that 0.8 C3 of guanidine trichloro-.
acetate was used as a base precursor in the solution A, . . .
and then treated in the same manner as in Example 21.
The results obtained are shown below.
Dye-fixing Maximum Mlnimum Material density density -A (Comparison) 0.12 0.12 C (Invention) 1.67 0.26 Example 23 The same procedure as in Example 21 was repeated except that each of the dye releasing redox compounds as shown below was used in place of the dye releasing redox compound (42). Thus, a dispersion or dye releasing redox compound was prepared.
Dye releasing redox compound (10) 5 g Dye releasing redox compound (68j 7.S g Dye releasing redox compound (21) 5 g Each sample was prepared in the -same manner as in Example 21. Then, the sample was treated in the same manner as in Example 21. The results obtained are shown below.
S Dispersion of dye Dye-fixing material Maximum Minimum releasing redox density density compound Dispersion of (10) A (Comparison) 0.12 0.12 (magenta) B (Invention) 1.64 0.25 Dispersion of (68) A (Comparison) 0.13 0.13 (yellow) B (Invention) 1.50 0.26 Dispersion of (21) A (Comparison) 0.10 0.10 (cyan) B (Invention) 2.00 0.33 From the foregoing results, it has been con-firmed that images of the high maximum density are obtainedby using the dye-fixing material of this invention.
~xample_24 Example 24 is an example in which an organic silver salt oxidizing agent was used.
A benzotriazole silver emulsion was prepared by the following manner.
In 3,000 my of water were dissolved 28 g of gelatin and 13.2 g of benzotriazole and the solution was stirred at 40C. Then a solution of 17 g of silver nitrate dissolved in 100 my of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period. The pH of the thus obtained benzotriazole silver emulsion was ~Z~536 adjusted to cause sedimentation and after removing exces-sive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 400 g of the benzotriazole silver emulsion.
Then, using this benzotriazole silver emulsion, a photosensitive coating composition was prepared by the following manner.
(a) Silver iodobromide emulsion 20 g (as ln Example 21) (b) Benzotriazole silver emulsion 10 g (c) Dispersion of dye releasing redox compound as in Example 21 33 g 10(d) Aqueous solution of S% compound having the following structure 5 mQ
CgHlg H
C--~C
HC CH
O O
- (CH2cH2O)lo (e) Aqueous solution oE 10%
compound having the follow-ing structure 4 mQ
H2NSO2N(CH3)2 (f) Water 20 mQ
Foregoing components (a to (f) were mixed and the same procedure as in Example 21 was repeated to prepare a sample.
As the dye-fixing material, the sheet A and ~2,,~353~
sheet B as used in Example 21 were respectively used.
The light-sensitive material as obtained above was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux.
Then, each of the dye-fixing materials (sheet A and sheet B) was closely brought into contact with the exposed light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat bloc at 130~C.
When each dye-fixing material was peeled oEf from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on only sheet B. The density of the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-519) and the results are shown below.
Dye-fixing Maximum Minimum Material density density A lComparison) 0.14 0.13 B (Invention) 1.81 0.25 From the foregoing results, it has been confirmed that images of the high maxi.mum density are obtained by using the dye-fixing material of this inventlon.
Example 25 After mixing components pa) to l shown below, each of the solution (hereinafter "solutions D,E,F,G and H", . --respectively) was uniform.Ly coated on a layer containing the dye-fixing agent as in Example 21 at a wet thickness of 60 em. Then, each coated sample was dried to prepare dye-fixing materials (hereinafter "sheets D, E, F, G and H", respectively).
(a) Water lO mQ
(b) Aqueous soluti.on of poly-vinyl alcohol (saponifica-tion degree: 98%) 12 g (c) Compound having the follow-ing structure 100 mg C = C \
HC CH
~C--C~
H \ / (CH2CH2O)8H
O
(d) Aqueous solution of 5% sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate 0.5 mQ
(e) Guanidine trichloro-acetate 0.4 g With respect to the foregoing components (a) to (e), D, E, F, G and H are common to each another, the hydrophilic thermal solvents used are as follows.
D: Pyridine N-oxide 4 g E: Sulfonamide 4 g F: Acetamide 4 g G: Urea and N-methylurea 2 g (each) H: Urea, N-methylurea, ethylene urea and ethylurea 1 g (each) The ligh~-sensitive material as obtained in Example 24 was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux.
Then, each of the dye-fixing materials was closely brought into contact with the exposed light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block at 130C.
When each dye-,ixing material was peeled off from the lighk-sensLtive material, a negative magenta image was obtained. The density of the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitomer (RD-519) and the results are shown below.
Dye-fixing Maximum Minimum Mater_al density density D 1.76 0.24 E 1.85 0.26 F . 1.60 0.22 G 1.86 0.26 H 1.90 0.28 From the foregoing results, it has been con-firmed that images of the high maximum density are obtained by using the dye-fixing material of this invention.
~L~43536 While the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiment thereof, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope thereof.
Useful sensitizina dyes include those described in German Patent 929,080, U.S. Patents 2,231,65~, 2,493,748, 2,503,776, 2,519,001, 2,912,329, 3,655,959, 3,672,897, 3,634,217, 4,025,349 and 4,046,572, British Patent 1,242,588, Japanese Patent Publication Nos.
14030~69 and 24844/77, etc.
These sen~;itizing dves can be em~loved individually, and call also be em~loved in combination thereof. A combination of sensitizing dyes is often used, particularly for the purpose of supersensitization.
representative examples thereof are describe in U.S. Patents 2,683,545, 2,977,229, 3,397,060, 3,522,052, 3,527,641, 3,ol7,233, 3,628,964, 3,666,4~0, 3,o72,898, 3,679,42~, 3,703,377, 3,769,301, 3,~14,609, 3,837,8O2 and 4,026,707, British Patents 1,344,281 and 1,507,803, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 4936/68 and 12375/78, Japanese Patent hDplication IOPI) Nos.
110618/77 and 109925/77, etc.
~43~36 The sensitizing dyes may be present in the emulsion together with dyes which themselves do not give rise to spectrally sensitizing effects but exhibit a supersensitizing effect or materials which do not sub-stantially absorb visible light bu-t exhibit a super-sensitizing effect. For example, aminostilbene compounds substituted wi-th a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic group (e.g., those described in U.S. Patents 2,933,390 and 3,635,721), aromatic organic acid-formaldehyde condensates (e.g., those described in U.S. Patent 3,7~3,510), cadmium salts, azaindene compounds, etc., can be present.
The combinations described in U.S. Patents 3,615,613, 3,615,641, 3,617,295 and 3,635,721 are particularly useful.
In the invention various dye releasing activators can be used by various manners, for example, by incorporat-ing them in any one of the layers of the light-sensitive material or the dye-ixing material. The dye releasing activator is a compound capable of accelerating the oxidat-ion-reduction of the photosensitive silver halide and/or the organic silver salt oxidizing agent with the dye releasing redox compound or capable of nucleophilically reacting with the oxidized dye releasing redox compound in the subsequent dye releasing reaction to accelerate the release of dye. Bases or base precursors are useful as the dye releasing activators. In the invention it is ~2~536 particularly advantageous for accelerating the reaction to use these dye releasing activators, but in the case of incorporating the dye releasing activators in the light-sensitive material, it is necessary to select the dye releasing activator which does not reduce the preservative property of the light sensitive material. Examples of preferred bases are amines which include trialkylamines, hydroxylamines, aliphatic polyamines, N-alkyl substituted aromatic amines, N-hydroxyalkyl substituted aromatic amines and bis[p-(dialkylamino)phenyl]methanes. Further, there are betaine tetramethylammonium iodide and diaminobutane dihydrochloride as described in U.S. Patent 2,410,644, and urea and organic compounds including amino acids such as 6-aminocaproic acid as described in U.5. Patent 3,506,444.
The base precursor is a substance which releases a basic component by heating. Examples ox typical base precursors are described in British Patent 998,949. A preferred base precursor is a salt of a carboxylic acid and an organic base, and examples of the suitable carboxylic acids include trichloroacetic acid and trifluoroacetic acid and examples of the suitable bases include guanidine, piperidine, morpholine, p-toluidine and 2-picoline, etc. Guanldine trichloroacetate as described in U.S. Patent 3,220,~46 is particularly preferred. Further, aldonic amides as described in Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 22625/75 are ~3536 1 preferably used because they decompose at-a high temperature to form bases.
These dye releasing activators can be used in an amount of a broad range. A useful range is up to 50%
by weight based on the amount of a dry layer coated of the light-sensitive material. A range of 0~01% by weight to 40~ by weight is more preerred.
It is advantageous to use a compound repre-sented by the general formula described below in the heat-developable color photographic maLerial in order to accelerate development and accelerate release of a dve.
.: .
l N-SO -N 3 (A) wherein Al, A2, A3 and A4, which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atop or a substit-uent selected from an alkyl group, a suhstituted alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted aryl group and a heterocyclic group;
and Al and A2 or A3 and A4 may combine with each other to form a ring.- -.
3~i3~
1 Specific examples of the compounds include H NSO2NH2~ ~2NSO2N(cH3~2, H2Nso2N(c2~5)2~ 2 2 3 H2NSO2N(C2H4OH)2 CH3N~SO2 3 C 2 2 The above described compound can be used in an amount of broad range. useful range is up to 20% by weight based on the amount of a dry layer coated of the light-sensitive material. A range of 0.1% by weight to 15% by welght is more preferred.
It iS advantageous to use a water releasing compound in the present invention in order to accelerate the dye rele~sin~ reaction.
The water releasing compound means a compound which releases water by decomposition during heat develop-ment. These compounds are particularly known in the field of printing of fahrics, and NH4Fe(SO~)2 12H2O, etc., as described in Japanese Patent Application lOPI) No. 88386/75 are use-Eul.
A support used in the present invention is that which can enc~ure at the processing temperature. As an ordinary support, not only glass, paper, metal or analogues thereof may be used, but also an ace-tyl cellulose film, a cellulose ester film,a polyvinyl acetal film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, a polyethylene terephthalate 'l'h'~353~
film, and a film related thereto or a plastic material may by used. The polyesters described in U.S. Patents 3,634,089 and 3,725,070 are preferably used.
A coating composition used in the invention can be prepared by blending, before use, a silver halide and an organic metal salt oxidizing agent formed separately, and it is also effective for the preparation of the coat-ing composition to blend both the components in a ball mill for a long period of time. It is also effective to I0 add a halogen-containing compound to the organic silver salt oxidizing agent to form a silver halide with silver in the organic silver salt oxidizing agent.
Method of preparing these silver halide and organic silver salt oxidizing agents and manners of blend-ing them are described in Research Disclosure, No. 17029, Japanese Patent Application (OPI~ Nos. 32928/75 and 42529/76, U.S. Patent 3,700,458, and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 13224/74 and 17216/75.
A suitable coating amount of the light-sensitive silver halide and the organic silver salt oxidizing agent employed in the present invention is in a total of prom 50 mg/m2 to 10 g/m2 calculated as an amount of silver.
.
f~3~53~
1 The pho'ographic emulsion layer and other hydrophilic colloid layers in the light-sensitive material of the present invention may contain various surface active agents for various purposes, for example, as coating aids or for prevention of electrically charging, improvement of lubricating property, emulsifi-cation, prevention of adhesion, improvement of photo-graphic properties for example, acceleration of development, rendering hard tone or sensitization), etc.
For example, it is possible to use nonionic surface active agents such as saponin (steroid), alkylene oxide derivatives (or example, polyethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol/polypropylene glycol condensates, polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers or polyethylene glycol alkylaryl ethers, polyethylene glycol esters, poly-ethvlene glycol sorbitan esters, polyalkylene glycol al~ylamine or amides, polyethvlene oxide adducts of silicone, etc.), glycidol derivatives (for example, alkenylsuccinic acid polyglycerides, alkylphenol poly-glycerides, etc.), polyhydric alcohol aliphatic acid esters or saccharide alkyl esters, etc.; anionic surface active agents containing acid groups such as a carboxy group, a sulfo group, a phospho group, a sulfate group, a phosphate group, etc., such as alkylcarboxylic acid salts, alkylsulfonic acid salts, alkylbenzenesulfonic 3~3~
1 acid salts; alkylnaphthalenesulfonic acid salts, alkyl sulfuric acid esters, alkylphosphoric acid esters, N-acyl-~-alkyltaurines, sulfosuccinic acid esters, sulfo-alkyl polyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers, polyoxyethylene alkylphosphoric acid esters, etc.; am~holytic surface active agents such as amino acids, aminoalkylsulfonic acids, aminoalkylsulfuric acid esters or phosphoric acid esters, alkylbetaines, amine oxides, etc.; and cationic surface active agents such as alkylamine salts, aliphatic or aromatic quaternary ammonium salts, heterocyclic quaternary ammonium salts such as pyridinium salts, , imidazolium salts, etc., aliphatic or heterocyclic phosphonium salts, aliphatic or heterocyclic sul~onium - salts, etc.
Of the above-described suxface active agents, polyethylene glycol type nonionic surface active agents having a recurring unit of ethylene oxide in their molecules may be preferably incorporated into the light-sensitive matexial. It is particularly preferred that the molecule contains 5 or more of the recurring units of ethylene oxide.
The nonionic surface active agents capable of satisfying the above described conditions are well known as to their structures, proper-ties and methods of synthesis. These nonionic surface active agents are L~3536 1 widely used even outside this field. Representative references relating to these agents include: Surfactant Science Series, Vol. 1, Nonionic Surfactants (edited by Martin I. Schick, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1967), and Surface Active Ethylene Oxide Adducts, (edited by Schoufeldt N
Pergamon Press, 1969). Among the nonionlc surface active agents described in the above mentioned references, those capable of satisfying the above described condi tions are preferably employed in connection with the present invention.
The nonionic surface active agents can be used individually or as a mixture of two or more of them.
The polyethylene glycol type nonionic surface active agents can be used in an amount of less than 100%
by weight, preferably less than 50% by weiqht, based on a hydrophilic binder.
The liqtlt-sensitive material of the present invention may contain a cationic compound containing a pyridinium salt. Examples of the cationic compounds containing a pyridinium group used are described in PSA Journal Section B 36 (1953), U.S. Patents 2,648,604 and 3,671,247, Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 30074/69 and 9503/69, etc.
~35,3G
1 Further, in the present invention, it is possible to use a compound which activates development simultaneously ~Ihile stabilizing the image. Particular ly, it is preferred to use isothiuroniums including 2-hydroxyethylisothiuronium trichloroacetate as described in U.S. Patent 3,301,678, bisisothi~roniums including 1,8-(3,6-dioxaoctane)-bis(isothiuronium trifluoroacetate), etc., as described in U.S. Patent 3,669,670, thiol compounds as described in German Patent Aplication (OLS) No. 2,162r714, thiazolium comnounds such as 2-amino-2-thiazolium trichloroacetate, 2-amino-5-bromoPthyl-2-thiazolium trichloroacetate, etc., as described in U.S.
Patent 4,012,260, compounds having ~-sulfonylacetate as an acid nart such as bis~2-amino-2-thiazolium)methylene-bis(sulfonylacetate~, 2-amino-2-thiazolium phenylsulfonyl-acetate, etc., as described in U.S. Patent 4,060,420, and compounds having 2-carboxycarboxamide as an acid part as described in U.S. Patent 4,088,496.
~13536 1 on the present invention, though it is not so necessary to urther incorporate substances or dyes for preventing irradiation or halation in the light-sensitive material, because the light-sensitive material is colored by the dye releasing redox compound, it is possible to add filter dyes or light absorbing materials, etc., as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 3692/73 and U.S. Patents 3,253,921, 2,527,583 and 2,956,879, etc., in order to further improve sharpness. It is preferred that these dyes have a thermal bleaching property. For example, dyes as described in U.S. Patents 3,769~019, 3,745,009 and 3,615,432 are pre erred.
The light-sensitive material used in the present invention may contain, if necessary, various additives known for the heat-develo~able light-sensitive materials and may have a layer other than the light-sensitive laver, for example, an antis-tatic layer, an electrically conductive layer, a protective layer, an intermediate layer, an antihalation layer, a strippable layer, etc.
3~
1 examples of various additives include those described in Research Disclosure, Vol. 170, No. 17029 (June, 1978), for example, plasticizers, dyes for improving sharpness, antihalation dyes, sensitizing dyes, matting agents, fluorescent whitening agents and fading preventing agent, etc.
The protective layer, the intermediate layer, the subbing layer, the back layer and other layers can be produced by preparing each coating solution and applying to a support by various coating methods such as a dip coating method, an air-knife coating method, a curtain coating method or a topper coating method as described in U.S. Patent 2,681,294 and drying in the same manner as used in preparing the heat-developable light-sensitive layer ox the present invention, by which the light-sensitive material is obtained.
If necessary, two or more layers may be applied at the same time by the method as described in U.S. Patent 2,761,791 and British Patent 837,095.
~2~53~
After the heat-developable color photographic material is exposed to light, the resulting latent image can be developed by heating the whole material to a suitably elevated temperature, for example, about 80C
to about 250C for about 0.5 second to about 300 seconds.
A higher temperature or lower temperature can be utilized to prolong or shorten the heating time, if it is within the above described tempera-ture range. Particularly, a temperature range of about 110C to about 160C is useful.
In the present invention, the light-sensitive material can be heated for development by an ordinary means such as a simple heating plate, a heating iron, a heat roller, a heating elernent utilizing carbon or titanium white, or a similar means.
In the image-forming process of the invention wherein a hydrophilic mobile dye is transferred onto a dye-fixing layer by heating the light-sensitlve material in the presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent, the transfer of the mobile dye may be initiated simultaneously with the release of the dye or after completing the release of the dye. Accordingly, heating for -the transfer of the mobile dye may be after heat development or simultaneously with heat development. The term "heating simultaneously with heat development" means that heating for development also acts as heating for transferring the dye released.
3~
The optimum heating temperature for development and the heating time necessary for the development do not always coincide with those for transferring the dye and hence, the heating temperatures may be selected independently.
Since the heating temperature for transferring the dye is 60C to 250C from the viewpoints of preservative property and workability of the light-sensitive material, etc., a material which exhibits the action as a hydro-philic thermal solvent in this temperature range may be properly used. It is, as a matter of course, necessary that the hydrophilic thermal solvent assists the quick transfer of dye, but considering also the heat resistance of the light-sensitive material, etc., the hydrophilic thermal solvent is required to have a melting point of 15 40C to 250C, preferably 40C to 200C, more preferably 40C to 150C.
The "hydrophilic thermal solvent" referred to in the invention is defined to be a compound which is in a solid state at room temperature but becomes in a liquid state upon heating, has an (inorganic property/organic property) value of larger than 1, and has a solubility in water at room temperature of higher than 1. In this case, the term "inorganic property/organic property" is a concep-tion for estimating the properties ofa compound and is described in detail in, for example, Kagaku no R~oiki 3~36 (The Domain of Chemistry), 11, page 719 (1957).
Since the hydrophilic thermal solvent has a role for assisting the transfer of the hydrophilic dye, it is preferred that the hydrophilic thermal solvent is a com-pound capable of acting as a solvent for the hydrophilic dye.
It is known by experiment that in a preferredsolvent for dissolving therein an organic compound, the tinorganic property/organic property) vaiue of the solvent is close to the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the organic compound. On the the other hand, the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the dye releasing redox compound used in the present invention is about 1, and the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the hydropilili.c dye released from the dye releasing redox cc)mpound is larger than the (inorganic property/organic property) value of the dye releasing redox compound and is preferably larger than l.S, more preferably larger than 2. Since it is preferred that the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention transfers only the hydrophilic dye and does not transfer the dye releasing redox compound, it is necessary that the (inorganic property/organic propexty) value of the hydrophilic thermal solvent is larger than the (inorganic property/organic property).value of the dye releasing redox compound. That is, it is necessary that the inorganic property/organic property) value of the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention be larger than 1, preferably larger than 2.
On the other hand, considering from the viewpoint of the size of molecule, it is preferred that molecules existing surrounding the transferring dye do not hinder the transfer of the dye and can also transfer by themselves.
Accordingly, it is preferred that the molecular weight of the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention be low, i.e., less than about 200, preferably less than about 10~. , It is enough that the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention can substantially assist the transfer of the hydrophilic dye formed from the dye 15 releasing redox compound by heat development onto a dye- -fixing layer. Therefore, the hydrophilic thermal solvent may be incorporated in not only a dye-fixing layer but also a photosensitive layer or in both the dye-fixing layer and the photosensitive layer. Furthermore, an independent layer containing a hydrophilic thermal solvent may be provided in the light-sensitive material and/or independent dye-fixing material having the dye-fixing layer. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the transfer efficiency of the dye onto the dye-fixing layer, it is preferred that the hydrophilic thermal solvent be incorporated in the ~LZ435~6 dye-fixing laver and/or a layer adjacent to the dye-fixing layer.
The hydrophilic thermal solvent is usually dissolved in water and dispersed in a binder, but it may be used by dissolving in an alcohol such as methanol, ethanol, etc.
The hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the inven-tion can be used in a coating amount of 5 to 500% by weight, preferably 20 to 200% by weight, more preferably 30 to 150~ by weight, based on the total coating amount of the coating compositions for the light-sensitive material and/or the dye-fixin~ material.
As the hydrophilic thermal solvent, there are, for example, ureas, pyridines, amides, sulfonamides, imides, alcohols, oximes, and other heterocyclic compounds.
Then, practical examples of the hydrophilic thermal solvent used in the invention are illustrated below.
`
(3~ 0 (4) 0 H~NCNHC2H5 CH3NHCNE~CH3 ( 5 ) o ( 6 ) o (7? o ( 8 ) o (9) I
H2 NCN ( C 2 H40H ) 2 ,r 1~L
~l'h43S36 ( 10) H
H21C~
O = O
H C -(11) H H
HO--IC-C - O
HO_ C_N
H H
(12) o H2N-C-N ( CH3 ) 2 (13) O \
HC CH
i1 N
o - .
~LZ~3S3~i (14) H
HO CH
HC O
~N~ CH2H
( 15 ) C 2 Hi HC CH
'I No (16) H H
O O
No C- CH 2 OH
C--C
H H
HO
H
r--C
N CH
O _ C//
H H
~L243536 ( 18) OH
H
C--C
N CH
/~
C--C
H H
(19) H H
C = C
C//
H H
( 2 O ) HO OH
C--C
N CH
O _ I/
H H
(21) OH
C =C
O CH
C--C
H H
lZ'~3536 (22) C
Hess IH
2 \ CH 20H
(23) H~2H40H
( 24 ) HC-N~
N~H
(25) (26) O O
Il 11 ( HCNH ) 2CH2 CH3CN1~2 ~4~536 (27) (28) (CH3CNH)2CH2 C=O
(29) (30) O O
(31) O
H Al C NHCH
HC (32) o l ll CC 2C 2 No C OH
(33) OH O
(CH3) CH - C - NH2 (34) (35) (36) (37) -- gl --3~3~
(38j (39) HOCH SO
2 1 2 (CH3)2 NHCH
(40) (41) H C f H HC - CH
O=C C=O N
H H
(42) (43) H2 C--Hc2 /C--C\ l I
\C ci N
(44) (46) HC CH (CH3CO)2NH
N
i3~;
(46) C =2 H H
~47) HOCH2 ( CHOH ) 3CE~20H
(48) (49) CH 3 C ( CH 20H ) 3 C 2H 5C ( CH 20H ) 3 (50) (51) 02NC ( CH20H ) 3 Sorbitol ( 52 ) OH ( 53 ) CH2H
J~H / OH\ f H
H2 \ /~H2 2 OH 2 ~2 CH20H
(54) HOCH2 -CH=CH-CH20H
..
35~
(55) (56) CH3CH=NOH HON=CHCH=NOH
(57) (58) CH3C=NOH HOCH2CH=NOH
(59) (60) H H H H
C C C C
H H C
H H
(61) (62) Ho Z~3536 In the foregoing specific compounds illustrated above as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, the compounds (1), (2), (3), and (10) in ureas, the compounds (17) and (19) in pyridines, the compounds (26), (30), and (33) in amldes, the compounds (34) and (36) in sulfonamides, the compounds (40), (41), (43), ancd (44) in imides, and the compounds (46) and (54) in alcohols are particularly preferred. The foregoing compounds used as the hydrc)philic thermal solvent may be used solely or as a mixture of two or more thereof.
In the invention, it is necessary to transfer a mobile hydrophilic dye for~.ed imagewise hy the heat development performed simultaneously with or after image exposure and fix the mobile dye onto a dye-fixincJ layer.
Accordingly, the light-sensitive material of t:his invention is composed of a support having thereon at least a photo-sensitive layer (I) containing a silver halicle, an organic silver salt oxidizing agent which may be used if necessary, a dye releasing redox compound which is also a reducing agent for the organic silver salt oxidizing agent, and a binder and a dye-fixing layer (II) capable of receiving a mobile hydrophilic dye formed in the layer tI). Such a photosensitive layer (I) and a dye-fixing layer (II) may be formed on the same support or separate supports respectively. The dye-fixing layer (II) and the photo-X,~3536 sensitive layer (I3 may be peeled off from each other.For example, after imagewise exposure and then uniform heating, the dye-fixing layer (II~ or the photosensitive layer tI) may be peeled off from the other. Also, in case that a light-sensitive material having the photo-sensitive layer (I) on a support and a dye-fixing material having the dye-fixing layer (II) on another support are prepared separately, after imagewise exposing the light-sensitive material and uniformly heating, the dye-fixing material is superposed on the resulting light-sensitive material to thereby transfer the mobile dye onto the dye-fixing layer (II). Further, there may be-a manner that only the photosensitive layer (I) is imagewise exposed and the dye-fixing layer (II) is then superposed thereon, followed by uniformly heating.
The light-sensitive material can be closely - brought into contact with the dye-fixing material by usual manners such as those by press roller, etc., and in this case, for sufficiently performing the close contact of both the materials, the heating is employable during the contacting.
In case that after the heat development after or simultaneously with imagewise expasure, the surface of the light~sensitive material is closely wrought into contact with the dye-receiving surface of the dye-fixing ~3S3~
material and then heated, the latter heating can contribute to only the dye transfer and hence, the heating temperature and the heating time for the latter heating may be select-ed independent on the heating for the development.
In the case of employing such method, it is preferred to perform the heating for development such that the heating contributes to the dye transfer as less as possible, and that -the reaction for the development is finished in a short period of time. On the other hand, it is preferred for obtaining a sharp image that the heating for transferring the dye released imagewise is performed at a temperature of as low as possible such that the heat reaction of the unexposed area does not occur, in a proper range of a transferring period of time.
The dye-fixing layer (II) may have a white reflection layer. For example, a layer of titanium dioxide dispersed in gelatin may be formed on a mordant-ing layer provided on a transparent support. The titanium dioxide layer forms a white opaque layer and hence, when the transferred dye image is viewed from the side of the transparent support, a reflection-type color image can be viewed.
The dye transfer from the light-sensitive layer to the dye-fixing layer can be carried out using a dye transfer assistant. Examples of useful dye transfer assistant include water and an alkaline aqueous solution containing sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide or an inorganic alkali metal salt. Further, a solvent having a low boiling point such as methanol, N,N-dimethyl-formamide, acetone, diisobutyl ketone, etc., and a mixture of such a solvent having a low boiling point with water or an alkaline aqueous solution can be used. The dye transfer assistant can be employed by wetting the image receiving layer with the transfer assistant or by incorporating it in the form of water of crystalliæation or microcapsules into the material.
The dye-fixing layer may contain a dye mordant for fixing the dye, a hydrophilic thermal solvent for assisting the transfer of the dye, a base and/or a base precursor for acceleratina the dye releasing reaction, etc., and further a binder for these materials. When the dye-fixing layer is formed on a support other than the support of the light-sensitive material, the foregoing embodiment that the dye-fixing layer contains the base and/or the base precursor is particularly preferred.
Since in the present invention, the dye in the light-sensitive material may transferred into the in-dividually provided dye-fixing material, in order to obtain a high-auality ultimate image fixed in the dye-;
~LZ~3536 fixing material, a specific means is required. That is, in order to increase the quality of the dye image trans-ferred onto the dye-fixing layer, it is useful to in-corporate a base and/or a base precursor into any one of the layers constituting the dye-fixing material.
Especially, it is preferred to incorporate a bcse ancl/or a base precursor into the dye-fix-n~ layer or a layer provided on the dye-fixing layer because the image density is sufficiently high as well as a sharp dye image can be obtained. As such a base and/or base precursor, the above-described bases and/or base precursors as the dye releasing activators useful in the light-sensitive material can, for example, be exemplified.
In the present invention, the ultimate image is formed in the dye-fixing material which is not light-sensitive. In this case, since the function for imparting "light sensitivity" and that for fixing the ultimate image be imparted to the light-sensitive material and the dye-fixing material independently, materials which sufficiently exhibit the respective fucntions can be widely selected.
As the base and/or base precursor used in the dye-fixing material of the invention, usual inorganic or organic bases and/or base precursors are useful. The "base precursors" referred to in the invention mean ones Z~j3G
releasing a basic component upon thermal decomposition.
Examples of the inorganic base include hydroxides of alkali metals or alkaline earth metals, diphosphates, triphosphates, borates, carbonates, quinolinates, pyro-S phosphates, metaphosphates, ammonium hydroxide, quaternaryalkylammonium hydroxides, and other hydroxides. Specific examples of these inorganic bases include lithium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, barium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, sodium quinolinate, potassium quinolinate, sodium diphosphate, potassium diphosphate, sodium triphosphate, potassium triphosphate, sodium pyrophosphate, potassium pyrophosphate, sodium metaphosphate, potassium metaphosphate, borax, ammonium hydroxide, tetramethylammonium, tetrabutylammonium, ammonia and the like.
Examples of the organic base used for the dye releasing activator of the present invention include aliphatic amines, aromatic amines, heterocyclic amines, amidines, cyclic amidines, quanidines, and cyclic quanidines, with those having a pea of higher than 8 being par-ticularly useful. In the invention, precursors of these organic bases can be used as preferred base precursors. Examples of such base precursors include salts of thermally decom-posable organic acids such as trichloroacetic acid, cyanoacetic acid, acetoacetic acid, etc., and salts of 2-carboxy carboxide as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,088,496.
Further, base precursors as disclosed in British Patent 998,945, U.S. Patent 3,220,846 and Japanese Patent Appli-cation ~OPI) No. 22625/75 can also be used. Still further, bases which are used as alkaline agents and buffers in the conventional photographic materials and their treating solutions may also be used.
Preferred examples of the organic base which can be used in the present invention include guanidine trichloroacetate, piperidine trichloroacetate, morpholine trlchloroacetate, p-toluidine trichloroacetate, and 2-picoline trichloroacetate. Eurther, the compounds as listed below can also be used.
MeNH2~ Me2NH, EtNH2 Et2NH, C4H9NH2 (C4~9)2NH, HOC2H4NH2 (HOC2H4)2NH~ H2NC2H4NH2 MeNH 2l c2~ c C2H4NH2 ~.2~3536 H2l Me21N
C5H40N 2 C2 4NMe2 Me2 l cH2 C3H6NMe2 H2C/ \
2 \N~ 2 H H2 j~H~
H C C
r~,2~536 H
~N~
H2C ON ~H2 I
1 2H4H (ON/
H2C/ \CH2 H2~ ~1H2 NH
I' H(~N
..!.
~43~36 Me2 ON ~C/I H
H2e lH2 Ho CH3 C--N
No /~H H2 C~3 I' 2 Ho l N HO OH
C--C
H H
Z~3536 HC -- S
HCI C = O CIH3 CH 3 \\~ --C
H H
G=C
NH
HN = O CH3 C
N=C
\ C /
NH
..
-H2~ H2 H
~lC/
C
H2N~ to N~C--NH NH2 MeNH
O = NH
MeNH
MeNH
~--NMe MeNH
353~
Me2N
O NH
Me2~
cH2 H2C~ ~N~ ~H2 H C--C
H2iC 1 - N
H 2 C / \ / 2 CH2 `C ' /~ I
3Si36 O
H3C f ` NCH3 CH
H CH
N f ... .
~12~3S36 -The base precursor used in the invention can be-used in a wide range in terms of its amount. But it is suitably used in an amount of less than 50% by weight, preferably Q.01 to 40% by weight, as calculated on the basis of the weight of the coated surface of the dye-fixing layer. In the present invention, the base and/or base precursor may be used either alone or in admixture of two or more thereof.
The base and/or base precursor is usually dis-solved in water or an alcohol and then dispersed in thedye-fixing layer. The dispersion may be performed in accordance with a method as disclosed in U.S. Patent 2,322,027 in which an organic solvent having a high boiling point is used. Further, there may be employed a method in which the base and/or base precursor is dissolved in an organic solvent having a boiling point of about 30 to 160C, such as lower alkyl acetates (e.g., ethyl acetat2 or butyl acetate), ethyl propionate, sec-butyl alcohol, methyl isobutyl ketone, ~-ethoxyethyl acetate, methyl cellosolve acetate, cyclohexane, etc., and then dispersed in the dye-fixing layer.
Examples of the organic solvent having a high boiling point include, for example, a phthalic acid alkyl ester (for example, dibutyl phthalate, dioctyl ?5 phthalate, etc.), a phosphoric acid ester (for example, diphenyl phosphate, triphenyl phosphate, tricresyl phos-phate, dioctylbutyl phosphate, e-tc.),` a citric acid ester 3L2'~3536 (for example, tributyl acetylcitrate, etch), a benzoic acid ester (for example, octyl benzoate, etc.), an alkyl amide (for example, diethyl laurylamide, etc.), an aliphatic acid ester (for example, dibutoxyethyl succinate, dioctyl azelate, etc.), a trimesic acid ester (for example, tributyl trimesate, etc.), etc. The above described orcanic solvents having a high boiling point and organic solvents havina a low boiling point may be used as a mixture thereof. Further, it is possible to use a dis-persion method using a polymer as described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 29853/76 and Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 59943/76.
., ,, ., = = . ., ., ., . ........... _ ..
The dye-fixing material of the invention may be constructed by plural layers of the dye-fixing layer and a layer or layers other than the dye-fixing layer, e.g., a protective layer, an interlayer, etc.
The dye-fixing layer of the invention is constructed by a single layer or plural layers and con-tains a dye mordant for fixiny the dye. The base and/or base precursor is used by dispersing in a layer or layers containing the dye mordant. Alternatively, the base and/or base precursor may be used by dispersing in a binder in a layer adjacent to the layer containing the dye mordant.
As the dye mordant, various mordants can be used. Among them are particularly preferred polymer mordants. The polymer mordant and the base and~or base precursor can be dispersed in the binder described below. The binder ~2~353~;
which can be used in the present invention can be employed individually or in a combination thereof. A hydrophilic binder can be preferably used as the binder according to the present invention. The typical hydrophilic binder is S a transparent or translucent hydrophilic colloid, examples of which include a natural substance, for example, protein such as gelatin, a gelatin derivative, a cellulose derivative, etc., a polysaccharide such as starch, gum arabic, etc., and a synthetic polymer, for example, a water-soluble polyvinyl compound such as polyvinyl pyrro-lidone, acrylamide polymer, etc. Another example of the synthetic polymer compound is a dispersed vinyl compound in a latex form which is used for the purpose of increas-ing dimensional stability of a pho-tographic ma-terial.
When the dye mordant is a polymer mordant, the mordant also acts as a binder and hence, the amount of the binder may be reduced or the binder may not parti-cularly be used. Contrarily, when the binder has a function as a mordant, the dye mordant may not be used.
Any materials which are usually used as a binder for photographic light-sensitive materials can be used as the binder in the inventionO
The mordant used for the dye-fixing layer of the invention can be properly selected from conventional mord-ants and among them, polymer mordants are particularlypreferred.
~'Z4~53~
1 Polymer mordants used in the present invention are polymers containing secondary and tertiary amino groups, polymers containing nitrogen-containing hetero cyclic moieties, polymers having quaternary cation groups thereof, having a molecular weight of from 5,000 to 200,000, and particularly from 10,000 to 50,000.
For example, there are illustrated vinyl-pyridine polymers and vinylpyri~inium cation polymers - as disclosed in U.S. Patents2,548,564, 2,484,430, 3,148,061 and 3,756,814, etc., polymer mordants capable of cross-linking with gelatin as disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,625,694, 3,859,096 and 4,128,538, British Patent 1,277,453, etc., aqueous sol type mordants as disclosed in U.S. Patents 3,958,99S, 2,721,852 and 2,798,063, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 115228/79, 145529/79 and 126027/79, etc., water-insoluble mordants as disclosed in U.S. Patent 3,898,088, etc., reactive mordants capable of forming covalent bonds with dyes used as disclosed in U.S. Patent 4,168,976 (Japanese Patent Application (OPI) No. 137333/79), etc., and mordants disclosed in U.S. Patents-3,709,690, 3,788,855, 3,642,482, 3,488,706, 3,557,066, 3,271,147 and 3,271,148, Japanese Patent Application (OPI) Nos. 71332/75, 30328/78, 155528/77, 125J78 and 1024/78, etc.
~2~536 1 In addition, mordants disclosed in U.S. Patents 2,675,316 and 2,882,156 can be used.
Of these mordants, for example, mordants capable of cross-linking with a matrix such as gelatin, water-insoluble mordants, and aqueous sol (or latex dispersion) t~7pe mordants are preferably used.
Particularly preferably polymer mordants are described below.
(1) Polymers having quaternary ammonium groups and groups capable of forming covalent bonds with gelatin (for example, aldehydo groups, chloroalkanoyl grou?s, chloroalkyl groups, vinylsulronyl groups, pyridinium-propionyl groups, vinylcarbonyl groups, alkylsulfonoxy croups, etc.), such as CH2--CH ) ~CH2--IC~
O , O
C=O , C=O
ce H3C--N--CH3 CH
`
~24353G
l (2) Reaction products between a copolymer comprising a repeating unit of a monomer represented by the general formula described below with a repeating unit of another ethylenically unsaturated monomer and a cross-linking agent for example, bisalkanesulonate, bisarenesulfonate, etch:
Rb ~CH--C - ) `
~b Q
Rb _ N--Rb wherein represents H or an alkyl group, R2 represents H, an alkyl group or an aryl group, Q represents a divalent group, Rb3, Rb4 and Rb5 each represents an alkyl group, an aryl group or at least two of Rb to Rb5 are bonded together to form a hetero ring, and X represents an anion. The above described alkyl groups and aryl groups may be substituted.
l (3) Polymers represented by the following general formula ox- ( B CH 2--CH~
, W ~,b . Rb wherein x is prom about 0.25 mol% to about 5 mol%, y is from about O mol% to about 90 mol%, z is from about lO mol% to about 99 mol%, A represents a monomer having at least two ethylenically unsaturated bonds, B represents a copolymeri~able ethylenically unsaturated monomer, Q
represents N or P, Rbl, Rb2 and Rb3 each represents an alkyl group or a cyclic hydrocarbon group or at least two of Rl to R~ are bonded together to form a ring (these groups and rings may be substituted), and M represents an anion.
.
1 (4) Copolymers composed of (a), (b) and (c), wherein (a) is X X
or CH=CH2 CH=CH 2 wherein X represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or a halogen atom (the alkyl group may be substituted);
~b~ is an acrylic ester; and (c) is acrylonitrile.
(5) Water-insoluble polymers wherein at least 1/3 of the repeating units are those represented by the following general formula ~CH2--CH 3 by ~,b CH 2 -RbZ
I b X~3 ~3 ~,z~53G
wherein Rlb; R2b and R3b each represents an alkyl group, with the total number of carborl atoms included being 12 or more the alkyl group may be substituted), and X represents an anion.
Various kinds of known gelatins can be employed as gelatin for the mordant layer For example, gelatin which is produced in a different manner such as lime-processed gelatin, acid-processed gelatin, etc., or a gelatin derivative which is prepared by chemically modify-ing gelatin such as phthalated gelatin, sulfonvlated gelatin, etc., can be used. Also, gelatin subjected to a desalting treatment can be used, if desired.
The ratio of polymer mordant to gelatin and the amount of the polymer mordant coated can be easily determined lS by one skilled in the art depending on the amount of the dye to be mordanted, the type and composition of the polymer mordant and further on the image-forming process used.
Preferably, the ratio of mordant to gelatin is from 20/80 to 80/20 (by weight) and the amount of the mordant coated is from 0.5 to 8 g/m2.
A typical dye-fixing material used in the inven-tion can be obtained by coating a mixture of a polymer containing an am~onium salt and gelatin on a transparent support.
When the dye-fixing layer is disposed on the 353~
surface of the dye-fixing material, a protective layer may be formed thereon, if desired. us such a protective layer, materials usually used for protective layers for photographic light-sensitive materials can be used, but when the dye-fixing layer is formed on a support different from the sup-port of the light-sensitive material, it is preferred that the protective layer is rendered hydrophilic in order to prevent hindering the transfer of the hydrophilic dye.
As the support of the dye-fixing material of the invention, the above described support used in the light-sensitive material can be optionally chosen. However, organic polymers which are resistant to the heating for the development or the dye transfer are preferred.
Examples of the organic polymers used in the dye-fixing material of the invention include polys~vrene having a molecular weight of 2,000 to 85,000, polystyrene derivatives having a substituent of up to 4 carbon atoms, polyvinylcyclohexane, polyvinylbenzene, polyvinylpyrroli-done, polyvinylcarbazole, polyallylbenzene, polyvinyl alcohol, polyacetals (e.g~, polyvinylformal or polyvinyl-butyral), polyvinyl chloride, chlorinated polyethylene, polyethylene trichlorofluoride, polyacrylonitrile, poly-N,N-dimethylallylamide, a polyacrylate having a p-cyanophenyl group, a pentachlorophenyl group, or a 2,4-dichlorophenyl group, polyacryl chloroacrylate, polymethyl methacrylate, 3~i3~
polyethyl methacrylate, polypropyl methacrylate, poly-isopropyl methacrylate, polyisobutyl methacrylate, poly-t-butyl methacrylate, polycyclohexyl methacrylate, poly-ethylene glycol dimethacrylate, poly~2-cyano-ethyl methacrylate, polyesters (e.g., polyethylene terephtha]ate), polysulfone, bisphenol A polycarbonate, polycarbonates, polyanhydrides, polyamides, and cellulose acetates. Also, synthetic polymers as described in Polymer Handbook, 2nd Edition (edited by J. Brandrup and E. H. Im~nergut), published by John Wiley & Sons Co. are useful as the organic polymers in this invention. These polymers may be used solely or as a combination of them.
Examples of the support advantageously used in this invention are films of cellulose acetates such as triacetate, diacetate, etc.; films of polyamides such as combinations of heptamethylenediamine and terephthalic acid, fluorenedipropylamine and adipic acid, hexamethylene-diamine and diphenic acid, hexamethylenediamine and isophthalic acid, etc.; films of polyesters such as the combinations of diethylene qlycol and diphenylcarboxylic acid, bis-p-carboxyphenoxybutane and ethylene ~lycol, etc.; polyethylene terephthalate films, polycarbonate films, etc. These films may be denatured. For example, a polyethylene terephthalate film denatured by using 25 cyclohexane dimethanol, isophthalic acid, methoxypoly- -ethylene glycol, 1,2-dicarbomethoxy-4-benzenesulfonic acid, etc., as a denaturant is advantageously used.
r 119 -353~
In the photographic light-sensi~ive material and the dye-fixing material of the present invention, the photographic emulsion layer and other binder layers may contain inorganic or organic hardeners. It is possible to use chromium salts (chromium alum, chromium acetate, etc.), aldehydes (formaldehyde, glyoxal, glutaraldehyde, etc.), N-methylol compounds (dimethylolurea, methylol dimethylhydantoin, etc.), dioxane derivatives (2,3-dihydroxydioxane, etc.), active vinyl compounds (1,3,5-triacryloylhexahydro-s-triazine, 1,3-vinylsulfonyl-2-propanol, etc.), active halogen compounds (2,4-dichloro-6-hydroxy-s-triazine, etc.), mucohalogenic acids (muco-chloric acid, mucophenoxychloric acid, etc.), etc., which are used individually or as a combination thereof.
As the heating means for iransferring the dye, various heating means as described above in regard to the heating means for the heat development can be used.
In the present invention, the light-sensitive material having the photosensitive layer and the dye-fixing layer on the same support or the dye-fixing material having the dye-fixing layer on a different support from what of the light-sensitive material can be prepared by coating respective coating compositions for the dye-fixing layer, protective layer, interlayer, subbing layer, backing layer, etc., in the same manners as described in - 12~ -353~
l the case of forming the photosensitive layer or other layer using a dipping method, an air knife method, a curtain coating method, or a hopper coating method as described in U.S. Patent No. 3,681,294, followed by drying.
Various means of exposure can be used in the present invention. Latent images are obtained by image-wise exposure by radiant rays including visible rays.
Generally, light sources used for conventional color prints can be used, examples of which include tungsten lamps, mercury lamps, halogen lamps such as iodine lamps, xenon lamps, laser ligh' sources, CRT light sources, fluorescent tubes and light-emitting diodes, etc.
The orisinal may be line drawings or photographs having gradation. Further, it is possible to take a photograph of a portrait or landscape by means of a camera. Printins from the original may be carried out by contact printing by superposing the original on the material or may be carried out by reflection printing or enlargement printing.
It is also possible to carry out the printing of imayes photographed by a videocamera or image informa-tions sent from a television broadcasting station by displaying on a cathode ray tube (CRT) or a fiber optical tube (FOT) and focusing the resulting image on the heat-developable photographic material by contacting therewith or by means of a lens.
Z~3s~6 l Recently, light-emitting diode (LED) systems which have been greatly improved have begun to be utilized as an exposure means or display means for various apparatus and devices. It is difficult to produce an LED which efectively emits blue light. In this case, in orcler to reproduce the color image, three kinds of LEDs consisting of those emitting each green light, red light and infrared light are used. The light-sensitive material to be sensitized by these lights is produced so as to release a yellow dve, a magenta dye and a cvan dye, respectively.
The light-sensitive material is produced using a construction such that the green~sensitive part (layer) contains a yellow dye releasing redox compound, the red-sensitive part (layer) contains a magenta dye releasinq redox compound and the in~rared-sensitive part slayer) contains a cyan dye releasing redox compound. Other combinations can be utilized, if necessary.
In addition to the above described methods af contacting or projecting ye original, there is a method of exposure wherein the original illuminated by a light source is stored in a memory of a reading computer by means of a light-receiving element such as a phototube 3536 I;
1 or a charge coupling device (CCD). The information is, if necessary, subjected to processing, the so-called image treatment, and resulting image information is reproduced on CRT which can be utilized as an image-like light source or lights are emitted by three winds of LED according to the prcoessed information.
The image-forming process of the invention is a very convenient image-forming process wherein the whole of steps from light exposure to heat development and dye-fixing can be performed in a completely dry system without particulalry supplying a solvent from the outside.
Furthermore, since in the image-forming process of the invention, not only sensitivity of a conventional so-called silver halide photographic material can be main-tained but aLso dye image formed is fixed in the dye-fixing material, the quality and the preservative property of the dye image thus formed are very good, the color repro-ducibility is good, and in spite of the completely dry system, the reproduction of color images can be sufficiently performed.
The image-forming process of the invention having such excellent features can be applied for the field of photography as well as can meet the recent requirement for the transfer of so-called soft images to hard images.
Moreover, in the image-forming process of the invention, 3~36 the dye image formed is fixed in the dye-fixing layer, whereby the dye image has a good preservative property and hence, the process of the invention can be conveniently utilized even in the case of requiring the preservation of dote images for a long period of time. Thus, the image-forming process of the invention exceeds conventional photographic techniques in the foregoing points.
Then, the invention will further be explained below in detail by the following examples but the invention is not limited to them.
Example l -Preparation o light-sensitive material D-l:
A silver iodobromide emulsion was prepared by the following manner.
lS on 3,000 mQ of water were dissolved 40 g of gelatin and 26 g of potassium bromide and the solution was stirred at 50C. Then, a solution ox 34 g of silver nitrate dis-solved in 200 mQ of water was added to the foregoing solu-tion for lO minutes and thereafter, a solution of 3.3 g of potassium iodide dissolved in lO0 mQ of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period to provide a silver iodobromide emulsion. Thy pH of the silver iodobromide emulsion thus obtained was adjusted to cause sedimentation, and after removing excessive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 353~
400 g of the silver iodobromide emulsion.
Then, a benzotriazole silver emulsion was pre-pared by the following manner.
In 3,000 mQ of water were dissolved 28 g of gelatin and 13.2 g of benzotriazole and the resultant solution was stirred at 40C. To the solution was added a solution of 17 g of silver nitrate dissolved in lO0 mQ
of water over a two minute period. The pH of the benzo-triazole silver emulsion thus formed was adjusted to cause sedimentation, and after removing excessive salts, the pH
of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 400 g of the ~enzotriazole silver emulsion.
Then, a gelatin dispersion of a dye releasing redox compound was prepared by the following manner.
In 20 my o' ethyl acetate were dissolved 5 g of the magenta dye releasing redox compound (42), 0.5 g of a surface active agent, succinic acid 2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate, and 5 g of tricresyl phosphate (TCP) under heating to about 60C to form a homogeneous solution.
The solution was mixed with lO0 g of an aqueous solution o lo limed gelatin with stirring and mixture was treat-ed by means of a homogenizer for lO minutes at lO,000 r.p.m.
to provide a dispersion of the magenta dye releasing redox compound.
A photosensitive layer was formed as follows.
~53~
(a) Silver iodobromide emulsion 20 g (b) Benzotriazole silver emulsion 10 g (c) Gelatin dispersion of dye releasing redox compound (42) 33 g (d) Aqueous solution of 2.5% com-pound (A) having the followiny structure lO mQ
9 l9 \ H
HC CH
C -C (CH2CEI2O)8H
o (e) Ethanol solution of lo guanidine trichloroacetate 12.5 mQ
(f) Aqueous solution of 10 dimethyl sulfamide 4 m.
Foregoing components (a) to ( f) were mixed under heating to provide a photosensitive coating com-position and the coating composition thus prepared was coated on a polyethylene terephthalate fil.m of 180 em in thickness at a wet thickness of 30 em.
Furthermore, a protective layer was formed on the photosensltive layer thus formed by the following manner.
(g) Aqueous solution of 10% gelatin 35 g (h) Ethanol solution ox 10%
guanidine trichloroacetate 5 mQ
(i) Aqueous solution of lo succinic acid-2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate 4 mQ
3~
(j) Water 56 mQ
A mixture of the foregoing components was coated on the photosensitive layer at a wet thickness of 25 em and then dried to provide light-sensitive material D-l.
Example 2 Preparation of light-sensitive material D-2:
By following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that dye releasing redox compound (68) was used in place of dye releasing redox compound (42) used in Example 1 and 5 g of the silver iodobromide emulsion was used in place of 10 g of the benzotriazole silver emulsion used for the photosensitive coating composition, light-sensitive material D-2 was prepared.
. Example 3 Preparation of light-sensitive material D-3:
In 1,000 mQ of water were dissolved 6.5 g of benzotriazole and 10 g of gelatin, and the solution was stirred at 50C. Then, a solution of 8.5 g of silver nitrate dissolved in 100 mQ of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period and further, a solution of 1.2 g of potassium bromide dissolved in 50 mQ
of water was also added to the solution over a two minute period. The pH of the emulsion thus prepared was adjusted to cause sedimentation, and after removing excessive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 200 g of the emulsion.
Then, by following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that 25 g of the foregoing benzotriazole silver emulsion containing photosensitive silver bromide was used in place of the silver iodobromide emulsion and the benzotriazole silver emulsion used for the photo-sensitive coating composition in Example 1 and further dye releasing redox compound (21) was used in place of dye releasing redox compound (42), light-sensitive material D-3 was prepared.
Example 4 Pre aration of li ht-sensitive materials D-4 to 6:
.P
By following the same procedures as in Examples 1 to 3 except that guanidine trichloroacetate used in Examples 1 to 3 were not used, light-sensitive materials D-4 to 6 were prepared.
Example 5 Preparation of light-sensitive material D-7:
By following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that the amount (220 mg) of guanidine trichloro-acetate used in Example 1 was reduced to 1/2 of the amount, i.e., to 110 mg, light-sensitive material D-7 was prepared.
Example 6 Pre aration of d e-fixin material R-l:
P Y
In 200 mQ of water was dissolved 10 g of poly-'ILz4353~
(methyl acrylate-co-N,N,N-trimethyl-N-vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride) (the ratio of methyl acrylate to vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride being 1 : 1) and the solution was uni-formly mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solution of 10%
S limed gelatin. The mixture was uniformly coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film at a wet thickness of 90 em.
After mixing components (k) to (oj shown below, the mixture was uniformly coated on the layer thus formed nt a wet thickness of 60 em and dried. Hereinafter, the 2nd layer was called as a hydrophilic thermal solvent layer.
(k) Urea (hydrophilic thermal solvent) 4 g tQ) Water 10 mQ
(m) Aqueous solution of 10 wt%
polyvinyl alcohol (saponifi-cation degree: 98%) 12 g (n) Compound A used in Example 1 100 mg (o) Aqueous solution of 5% sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate 0.5 mQ
Examples 7 to 9 Prepara-tion of dye-fixing materials R-2, R-3 and R-4:
By following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that 4 g of pyridine N-oxide was used in place of 4 g of urea used in Example 6 as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, dye-fixing material R-2 was prepared.
;~4353~
Also, by following the same procedure as above using 4 g of sulfonamide and 4 g of acetamide, respectively, as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, dye-fixing materials R-3 and R-4 were prepared, respectively.
Examples 10 and ll Preparation of dye-fixing materials R-5 and R-6:
By following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that a mixture of 2 g of urea and 2 g of N-methyl urea was used in place of 4 g of urea used in Example 6 as the hydrophilic thermal solvent, dye-fixing material R-5 was prepared.
Also, by following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that a mixture of 1 cJ of urea l g of N-methylurea, l g of ethylurea, and 1 g of ethylene urea was used in place of 4 g of urea used in Example 6, dye-fixing maierial R-6 was prepared.
Examples 12 to 14 Preparation of dye-fixing materials R-7 to R-9:
By following the same procedure as in Example 6 except 6 except that 0.8 g of guanidine trichloroacetate was added to the coating composition for the 2nd layer (hydrophilic thermal solvent layer) in Example 6, dye-fixing material R-7 was prepared.
Also, by following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that each of 0.4 g of guanidine trichloro-3S3~
acetate and 0.4 g of sodium carbonate was added to the coating composition for the 2nd layer in Example 6, dye-fixing materials R~8 and R-9 were prepared, respectively.
Example 15 Light-sensitive material D-l was imagewise exposed for lO seconds usiny a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux and thereafter was uniformly heated for 20 seconds on a heat block heated to 140C.
Then, each of dye-fixing materials R-l to R-9 was closely brought into contact with the light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a ~ace-to-face relationshlp with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block at 120C.
When each dye-fixing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on each dye-fixing material. The density of -the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-504) and the results are shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Minimum Dye-fixing Hydrophilic thermal Maximum density material solvent dens.it~ (unexposed area R-l urea 1.20 0.13 R-2 pyridine oxide 1.15 0.12 R-3 sulfonamide 0.99 0.14 R-4 acetamide 0.98 0.10 R-5 urea/N-methylurea 1.23 0.14 R-6 urea/N-methylurea/
ethylurea/ethylene urea 1.25 0.15 R-7 urea 1.28 0.22 R-8 urea 1.26 0.18 R-9 urea 1.21 0.19 From the foregoing results, it has been confirmed that images of the high maximum density are obtained without supplying water by using the dye-fixing materials contain-ing the hydrophilic thermal solvents, respectively, and also particularly sharp images are obtained in the case of using the dye-fixing materials (R-5 and R-6) contain-ing two or more kinds of the hydrophilic thermal solvents.
Example 16 Each of light-sensitive materials D-l to D-3 in Examples 1 to 3 was exposed and heat developed as in Example 15. Each of the light-sensitive materials was closely brought into contact with dye-fixing material 353~
R-l shown in Example 6 with the coated layers in a face-to-face relationship and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block at 120C. When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from each of the light-sensitive sheets, each of negative magenta, yellow, and cyan images was obtained on the dye-fixing material. The densities of each negative image thus obtained were measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-504) and the results are shown in Table 2.
Table 2 Ligh-t-sensitive Dye releasing Maximum Minimum Material re(lox compound Hue dens-ty density D-l Compound (42) magenta 1.20 0.13 D-2 " (68) yellow 1.25 0.12 D-3 . " (21) cyan 1.10 0.18 Yrom the above results, it has been confirmed that the image of high cyan, magenta, or yellow maximum density was obtained without supplying water by using the dye-fixing material containing the hydrophilic thermal sovlent.
Example 17 Each of light-sensitive materials D-4 to D-6 in Example 6 was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux. Each of the light-sensitive materials was closely brought into contact with dy~-fixing ~L~L~3536 material R-8 in Example 13 with the coated layers in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block of 130C.
. When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from each light-sensitive sheet, negative magenta, yellow, and cyan images were formed on the dye-fixing material respective-ly. The densities of each negative ima~Je thus formed were measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-504) and the results are shown in Table 3.
Table 3 tight-sensitive Dye releasing . Maximum Minimum material redox compound Sue ensity dens D-4 Compound (42) magenta 1.16 0.15 D-5 " (68) yellow 1.20 0.16 D-6 (21) cyan 1.03 0.20 From the above results, it has been confirmed that images of high maximum density are obtained in tne case of performing heat development ancl dye transfer simultaneously by using the dye-fixiny material containing the hydrophilic thermal solvent.
Example 18 The light exposure, heat development and transfer were performed in the same manner as in Example 17 except that dye-fixing material R-9 was used in place of dye-fixing material R-8 used in Example 17 and as the result, - 13~. - -- ~z43S3~
each of negative magenta, yellow and cyan images was obtained on the dye-fixing material as in the case of using R-8.
Example 19 By following the same procedure as in Example 1 except that 1.5 g of hydrophilic thermal solvent (1), urea was added to the photosensitive coating composition for the light-sensitive material D-l in Example 1, light-sensitive material D-8 was prepared.
Furthermore, by following the same procedure as in Example 6 except that in dye-fixing material R-l in Example 6, the coating amount of urea in the hydro-philic thermal solvent layer was reduced to 1/2 of the amount thereof in Example 6, dye-fixing material R-10 was prepared.
Light-sensitive material D-8 was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux and thereafter was uniformly heated for 20 seconds to 130C. Then, the light-sensitive material was closely brought into contact with dye-fixing material R-10 with the coated layer in a face-to-facè relationship with each other and the assembly was heated for 20 seconds to 120C.
When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image having a high density was ohtained on the dye-fixing material. When the . .
1~3S3~
density of the negative color image was measured using aMacbeth densitometer (RD-504), the maximum density was 1.22 and the minimum density was 0.19. Thus, it has been confirmed that a dye image having a high density can be obtained by heating in a short period of time without supplying water by incorporating the hydrophilic thermal solvent in the light-sensitive material.
Example 20 Dye-fixing material R-ll used in the invention was prepared as follows.
In 200 mQ of wa-ter were dissolved 10 g of poly-(methyl acrylate-co-N,N,N-trimethyl-N-vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride) (ratio of methyl acrylate to vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride being 1:1) and 25 g of hydrophilic thermal solvent (1) and the solution was uniformly mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solu-tion of 10% limed gela-tin. The mixture was uniformly coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film at a wet thickness of 90 em.
On the layer thus formed was coated polyvinyl alcohol at a dry thickness of 1.5 em to provide dye-fixing material R-ll.
Light-sensitive material D-l was imagewise exposed for 10 minutes using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux and thereafter was uniformly heated for 20 seconds on a heat block heated to 140C.
3~;
Then, the light-sensitive material was closely brought into contact with dye-fixing material R-ll with the coated layers in a face-to-face relationship with each other and the assembly was heated for 30 seconds on S a heat block at 120C~
When the dye-fixing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on the dye-fixing material. When the densities of the negative image thus obtained were measured using a Macbeth densitolneter (RD-504), the maximum density was 1.26 and the minimum density was 0.18.
Thus, it has been con irmed that a color image - having the high maximum density is obtained without supplying water by using the dye-fixing material contain-ing the hydrophilic thermal solvent in the dye-fixing layer.
Exam?le 21 In 3,000 mQ of water were dissolved 40 g of gelatin and 26 g of po-tassium bromide and the solution was stirred at 50C. Then, a solution of 34 g of silver nitrate dissolved in 200 my of water was added to the foregoing solution and thereafter, a solution of 3.3 g of potassium iodide dissolved in 100 my of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period to provide a silver iodobromide emulsion. The pH of the 353~
silver iodobromide emulsion thus obtained was adjusted to cause sedimentation and after removing excessive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 400 g of the silver iodobromide emulsionO
Then, a gelatin dispersion of a dye releasing redox compound was prepared by the following manner.
In 30 mQ of ethyl acetate were dissolved 5 g of the magenta dye releasing redox compound (42), 0.5 g of a surface active agent, succinic acid 2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate, and 5 g of tricresyl phosphate (TCP) under heating to about 60C to form a homogeneous solution.
The solution was mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solution-of 10% limed gelatin with stirring and the mixture was treated by means of a homogenizer for 10 minutes at 15 10,000 r.p.m. to provide a dispersion of the magenta dye releasing redox compound.
Then,a photosensitive coating composition was prepared by the following manner.
(a) Photosensitive silver iodobromide emulsion 25 g 20 (b) Dispersion of dye releasing redox compound 33 g (c) Aqueous solution of 5% compound having the following structure 5 mQ
C gHl9 C C
O O
H \ O / (CH2CH2O)loH
(d) Aqueous solution of 10% compound having the following structure 4 mQ
H2N - SO2 - N(CH3)2 (e) Water 20 mQ
Foregoing components (a) to (e) were mixed under heating to provide a photosensitive coating composi-tion and the coating composition thus prepared was coated on a polyethylene terephthalate film o 180 em in thick-ness at a wet thickness of 30 em.
Furthermore, a protective layer was formed on the photosensi.tive layer thus formed by the following manner.
(a) Aqueous solution of 10% gelatin 35 g (b) Aqueous solution of 1% succinic acid-2-ethylhexyl ester sodium sulfonate 4 mQ
(c) Water 61 mQ
A mixture of the foregoing components was coated on the photosensitive layer at a wet thickness of 25 I. .
Then, a dye-fixing material containing a dye-~2~3536 fixing agent was by the following manner.
In 200 mQ of water was dissolved 10 g of poly-(methyl acrylate-co-N,N,N-trimethyl-N-vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride) (the ratio of methyl acrylate -to vinylbenzyl ammonium chloride being 1:1) and the solution was uniformly mixed with 100 g of an aqueous solution of 10% limed gelatin, The mixture was uniformly coated on a 120 ~m-thick polyethylene terephthalate film having dispersed therein titanium dioxide at a wet thickness of 90 em.
After mixing and dissolving components (a) to (e) shown below, the solution (hereinafter "solution A"?
was uniformly coated on the layer thus formed at a wet thickness of 60 em.
(a) Urea (hydrophilic heat solvent) 4 g (b) Water 10 mQ
(c) Aqueous solution of 10 wt.%
polyvinyl alcohol (saponifica-tion degree: 9~%) 12 g (d) Compound having the following structure 100 mg 9 19 \ H
/C--C
HC CH
O O
H \ / (CH2cH2)8H
o - I\
(e) Aqueous solution ox 5~ sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate 0.5 mQ
This coating sample was dried and used as a dye-ixing material (hereinafter .''sheet A"). The same procedure as above was repeated except that 0.4 g of sodium carbonate was used as a base in the solution A
to prepare a coating solution (hereinafter "solution B").
Using this solution B, a dye-ixing material was obtained in the same manner as above (this dye-fixing material being hereinafter referred to "sheet B").
The li~ht-sensitive material as obtained above was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux.
Then, each of the dye-fixin~ materials as prepared above was closely brought into contact with the light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heA-ted for 30 seconds on a heat block at 130C.
When each dye-fi~ing material was peeled off from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on only sheet B. The density of the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-519) and the results are shown below.
~2~S3~
Dye-fix.ing Maximum Minimum Material density density A (Comparison) 0.13 0.13 B (Invention) 1.70 0.22 From the foregoing results, it has been con-firmed that images of the high maximum density are obtained by using the dye-fixing material of this invention.
Example 22 A sample was prepared in the same manner as in Example 21 except that 0.8 C3 of guanidine trichloro-.
acetate was used as a base precursor in the solution A, . . .
and then treated in the same manner as in Example 21.
The results obtained are shown below.
Dye-fixing Maximum Mlnimum Material density density -A (Comparison) 0.12 0.12 C (Invention) 1.67 0.26 Example 23 The same procedure as in Example 21 was repeated except that each of the dye releasing redox compounds as shown below was used in place of the dye releasing redox compound (42). Thus, a dispersion or dye releasing redox compound was prepared.
Dye releasing redox compound (10) 5 g Dye releasing redox compound (68j 7.S g Dye releasing redox compound (21) 5 g Each sample was prepared in the -same manner as in Example 21. Then, the sample was treated in the same manner as in Example 21. The results obtained are shown below.
S Dispersion of dye Dye-fixing material Maximum Minimum releasing redox density density compound Dispersion of (10) A (Comparison) 0.12 0.12 (magenta) B (Invention) 1.64 0.25 Dispersion of (68) A (Comparison) 0.13 0.13 (yellow) B (Invention) 1.50 0.26 Dispersion of (21) A (Comparison) 0.10 0.10 (cyan) B (Invention) 2.00 0.33 From the foregoing results, it has been con-firmed that images of the high maximum density are obtainedby using the dye-fixing material of this invention.
~xample_24 Example 24 is an example in which an organic silver salt oxidizing agent was used.
A benzotriazole silver emulsion was prepared by the following manner.
In 3,000 my of water were dissolved 28 g of gelatin and 13.2 g of benzotriazole and the solution was stirred at 40C. Then a solution of 17 g of silver nitrate dissolved in 100 my of water was added to the foregoing solution over a two minute period. The pH of the thus obtained benzotriazole silver emulsion was ~Z~536 adjusted to cause sedimentation and after removing exces-sive salts, the pH of the emulsion was adjusted to 6.0 to provide 400 g of the benzotriazole silver emulsion.
Then, using this benzotriazole silver emulsion, a photosensitive coating composition was prepared by the following manner.
(a) Silver iodobromide emulsion 20 g (as ln Example 21) (b) Benzotriazole silver emulsion 10 g (c) Dispersion of dye releasing redox compound as in Example 21 33 g 10(d) Aqueous solution of S% compound having the following structure 5 mQ
CgHlg H
C--~C
HC CH
O O
- (CH2cH2O)lo (e) Aqueous solution oE 10%
compound having the follow-ing structure 4 mQ
H2NSO2N(CH3)2 (f) Water 20 mQ
Foregoing components (a to (f) were mixed and the same procedure as in Example 21 was repeated to prepare a sample.
As the dye-fixing material, the sheet A and ~2,,~353~
sheet B as used in Example 21 were respectively used.
The light-sensitive material as obtained above was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux.
Then, each of the dye-fixing materials (sheet A and sheet B) was closely brought into contact with the exposed light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat bloc at 130~C.
When each dye-fixing material was peeled oEf from the light-sensitive material, a negative magenta image was obtained on only sheet B. The density of the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitometer (RD-519) and the results are shown below.
Dye-fixing Maximum Minimum Material density density A lComparison) 0.14 0.13 B (Invention) 1.81 0.25 From the foregoing results, it has been confirmed that images of the high maxi.mum density are obtained by using the dye-fixing material of this inventlon.
Example 25 After mixing components pa) to l shown below, each of the solution (hereinafter "solutions D,E,F,G and H", . --respectively) was uniform.Ly coated on a layer containing the dye-fixing agent as in Example 21 at a wet thickness of 60 em. Then, each coated sample was dried to prepare dye-fixing materials (hereinafter "sheets D, E, F, G and H", respectively).
(a) Water lO mQ
(b) Aqueous soluti.on of poly-vinyl alcohol (saponifica-tion degree: 98%) 12 g (c) Compound having the follow-ing structure 100 mg C = C \
HC CH
~C--C~
H \ / (CH2CH2O)8H
O
(d) Aqueous solution of 5% sodium dodecylbenzenesulfonate 0.5 mQ
(e) Guanidine trichloro-acetate 0.4 g With respect to the foregoing components (a) to (e), D, E, F, G and H are common to each another, the hydrophilic thermal solvents used are as follows.
D: Pyridine N-oxide 4 g E: Sulfonamide 4 g F: Acetamide 4 g G: Urea and N-methylurea 2 g (each) H: Urea, N-methylurea, ethylene urea and ethylurea 1 g (each) The ligh~-sensitive material as obtained in Example 24 was imagewise exposed for 10 seconds using a tungsten lamp at 2,000 lux.
Then, each of the dye-fixing materials was closely brought into contact with the exposed light-sensitive material so that the coated layers were in a face-to-face relationship with each other and each assembly was heated for 30 seconds on a heat block at 130C.
When each dye-,ixing material was peeled off from the lighk-sensLtive material, a negative magenta image was obtained. The density of the negative image thus formed was measured using a Macbeth densitomer (RD-519) and the results are shown below.
Dye-fixing Maximum Minimum Mater_al density density D 1.76 0.24 E 1.85 0.26 F . 1.60 0.22 G 1.86 0.26 H 1.90 0.28 From the foregoing results, it has been con-firmed that images of the high maximum density are obtained by using the dye-fixing material of this invention.
~L~43536 While the invention has been described in detail and with reference to specific embodiment thereof, it will be apparent to one skilled in the art that various changes and modifications can be made therein without departing from the spirit and scope thereof.
Claims (19)
1. A dry image-forming process which comprises heat developing a light-sensitive material comprising a support having thereon at least a photosensitive silver halide, a binder, and a dye releasing redox compound, said dye releasing redox compound being reductive to the photo-sensitive silver halide and being capable of releasing a hydrophilic dye upon reaction with the photosensitive silver halide under heating, after or simultaneously with imagewise exposure, to form imagewise a mobile hydro-philic dye and heating, after or simultaneously with the heat development, the light-sensitive material together with a dye-fixing layer in t h e presence of a hydrophilic thermal solvent to thereby transfer the mobile hydrophilic dye onto the dye-fixing layer to form a dye image and fix the dye image.
2. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein the heat development is carried out in a state containing substantially no water.
3. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said dye releasing redox compound is a compound represented by the following general formula (I):
Ra-SO2-D (I) wherein Ra represents a reducing group capable of being oxidized by the silver halide; and D represents an image forming dye protion containing a hydrophilic group.
Ra-SO2-D (I) wherein Ra represents a reducing group capable of being oxidized by the silver halide; and D represents an image forming dye protion containing a hydrophilic group.
4. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said photosensitive silver halide is silver chloroiodide, silver iodobromide, or silver chloroiodobromide.
5. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein an organic silver salt oxidizing agent is co-present together with said photosensitive silver halide.
6. A process as claimed in Claim 5, wherein said organic silver salt oxidizing agent is a silver salt of an aliphatic carboxylic acid or a silver salt of an aromatic carboxylic acid.
7. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said light-sensitive material further comprises a dye releasing activator.
8. A process as claimed in Claim 7, wherein said dye releasing activator is a base and/or a base precursor.
9. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said light-sensitive material further comprises a com-pound represented by the following general formula:
(A) .
wherein A1; A2, A3, and A4, which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atom or a substit-uent selected from an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted aryl group and a heterocyclic group;
and A1 and A2 or A3 and A4 may combine with each other to form a ring.
(A) .
wherein A1; A2, A3, and A4, which may be the same or different, each represents a hydrogen atom or a substit-uent selected from an alkyl group, a substituted alkyl group, a cycloalkyl group, an aralkyl group, an aryl group, a substituted aryl group and a heterocyclic group;
and A1 and A2 or A3 and A4 may combine with each other to form a ring.
10. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said light-sensitive material further comprises a water releasing agent which releases water by decomposition during the heat development.
11. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein the heating for the development is carried out at a temperature of 80°C to 250°C.
12. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein the heating for the transfer is carried out at a tempe-rature of 60°C to 250°C.
13. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said hydrophilic thermal solvent is a non-hydrolyzable organic material which is solid at an ambient temperature but melts together with other components at a temperature of heat treatment or below.
14. A process as claimed in Claim 13, wherein said hydrophilic thermal solvent has an (inorganic property/organic property) value of larger than 1 and a solubility in water at room temperature of higher than 1.
15. A process as claimed in Claim 1, wherein said dye-fixing layer is provided in a dye-fixing material.
16. A process as claimed in Claim 15, wherein said dye-fixing material comprises a support having thereon at least a dye-fixing agent, a hydrophilic thermal solvent and a base and/or a base precursor.
17. A process as claimed in Claim 16, wherein said dye-fixing agent is a dye mordant.
18. A process as claimed in Claim 16, wherein said support is identical to the support of said light-sensitive material.
19. A process as claimed in Claim 16, wherein said support is a different support from the support of said light-sensitive material.
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
JP4209283A JPS59168439A (en) | 1983-03-16 | 1983-03-16 | Dry type image forming method |
JP42092/83 | 1983-03-16 | ||
JP5517283A JPS59182447A (en) | 1983-04-01 | 1983-04-01 | Dye fixing material for dry formation of image |
JP55172/83 | 1983-04-01 |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA1243536A true CA1243536A (en) | 1988-10-25 |
Family
ID=26381736
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA000449791A Expired CA1243536A (en) | 1983-03-16 | 1984-03-16 | Dry image-forming process |
Country Status (3)
Country | Link |
---|---|
EP (1) | EP0119615B1 (en) |
CA (1) | CA1243536A (en) |
DE (1) | DE3468751D1 (en) |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5238792A (en) * | 1992-04-20 | 1993-08-24 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Imageable articles having dye selective interlayers |
US5240809A (en) * | 1992-04-20 | 1993-08-31 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Imageable articles having dye selective interlayers |
US5262272A (en) * | 1992-10-08 | 1993-11-16 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Dye permeable polymer interlayers |
US5264321A (en) * | 1992-07-16 | 1993-11-23 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Photothermographic elements with novel layer structures |
Families Citing this family (10)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPS6291942A (en) * | 1985-10-18 | 1987-04-27 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Image forming method |
DE3539996A1 (en) * | 1985-11-12 | 1987-05-21 | Agfa Gevaert Ag | HEAT DEVELOPMENT PROCESS AND SUITABLE COLOR PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERIAL FOR THIS |
US6277537B1 (en) * | 1991-12-06 | 2001-08-21 | Eastman Kodak Company | Dye diffusion image separation systems with thermal solvents |
US5275927A (en) * | 1992-07-16 | 1994-01-04 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Photothermographic articles containing novel barrier layers |
EP0687572B1 (en) | 1994-06-15 | 1997-08-20 | Agfa-Gevaert N.V. | Thermosensitive recording method |
DE69505605T2 (en) | 1994-07-13 | 1999-05-27 | Agfa-Gevaert N.V., Mortsel | Heat sensitive recording material |
EP0775592B1 (en) | 1995-11-27 | 2002-09-11 | Agfa-Gevaert | Thermal image-forming process |
EP0775595B1 (en) | 1995-11-27 | 1999-09-15 | Agfa-Gevaert N.V. | Thermographic recording material with phosphoric acid derivative as lubricant |
EP0782043B1 (en) | 1995-12-27 | 2003-01-15 | Agfa-Gevaert | Thermographic recording material which improved tone reproduction |
DE69635743T2 (en) | 1996-11-29 | 2006-08-17 | Agfa-Gevaert | Thermosensitive recording element and method of making a lithographic printing plate therewith |
Family Cites Families (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
NL274438A (en) * | 1961-02-17 | |||
US3438776A (en) * | 1964-12-28 | 1969-04-15 | Eastman Kodak Co | Non-aqueous silver halide photographic process |
DE1572048C3 (en) * | 1965-09-10 | 1978-10-26 | Hoechst Ag, 6000 Frankfurt | Heat developable diazotype material |
JPS57179840A (en) * | 1981-04-30 | 1982-11-05 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Heat developing color photosensitive material |
JPS57198458A (en) * | 1981-06-01 | 1982-12-06 | Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd | Heat developing color photosensitive material |
-
1984
- 1984-03-16 CA CA000449791A patent/CA1243536A/en not_active Expired
- 1984-03-16 DE DE8484102945T patent/DE3468751D1/en not_active Expired
- 1984-03-16 EP EP19840102945 patent/EP0119615B1/en not_active Expired
Cited By (5)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5238792A (en) * | 1992-04-20 | 1993-08-24 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Imageable articles having dye selective interlayers |
US5240809A (en) * | 1992-04-20 | 1993-08-31 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Imageable articles having dye selective interlayers |
US5264321A (en) * | 1992-07-16 | 1993-11-23 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Photothermographic elements with novel layer structures |
US5364733A (en) * | 1992-07-16 | 1994-11-15 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Photothermographic elements with novel layer structures, each of which contains a thermally-diffusible oxidizable leuco dye and process for producing a color image from leuco dye |
US5262272A (en) * | 1992-10-08 | 1993-11-16 | Minnesota Mining And Manufacturing Company | Dye permeable polymer interlayers |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
EP0119615B1 (en) | 1988-01-13 |
DE3468751D1 (en) | 1988-02-18 |
EP0119615A3 (en) | 1984-12-12 |
EP0119615A2 (en) | 1984-09-26 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US4430415A (en) | Heat-developable photographic material with fine droplets containing silver halide, organic silver salt oxidizing agent and color image forming substance | |
EP0076492B1 (en) | Heat-developable color photographic material | |
EP0079056B1 (en) | Heat-developable color photographic material | |
US4473631A (en) | Heat-developable color photographic material | |
CA1243536A (en) | Dry image-forming process | |
JPS59157637A (en) | Color photosensitive material for heat development | |
JPH0251494B2 (en) | ||
JPH0588820B2 (en) | ||
JPH0414338B2 (en) | ||
JPH0411019B2 (en) | ||
US5064742A (en) | Dry image-forming process using thermal solvents | |
JPH0368372B2 (en) | ||
GB2135465A (en) | Heat-developable color photographic material | |
USH98H (en) | Heat-developable color photographic material | |
EP0123913B2 (en) | Heat developable color photographic materials | |
JPH0554109B2 (en) | ||
JPH0251496B2 (en) | ||
US5250386A (en) | Dry image-forming process | |
US4473632A (en) | Heat-developable color photographic material | |
EP0123904B2 (en) | Heat developable photographic material | |
JPH0251497B2 (en) | ||
JPH0362255B2 (en) | ||
JPH0374376B2 (en) | ||
JPH0374377B2 (en) | ||
JPH0583898B2 (en) |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
MKEX | Expiry |